W501 - NEW THAR - OwnersManual

Owner’s Manual
____________________________________________________________________________________
Issue Date: Septe mbe r 2020
Revision Date: October 2020
N O T E : Carefully read, understand and follow the instructions provided in this manual, and keep it in a safe place for future reference. If you have any
doubt whatsoever regarding the use or care of your vehicle, please visit your Mahindra Dealer for assistance or advice.
This Owner's Manual should be considered as an integral part of the vehicle and should remain with the vehicle.
__________________________________________________________________________________
MAHINDRA & MAHINDRA LTD., GATEWAY BUILDING, APOLLO BUNDER, MUMBAI - 400 039
www.mahindra.com
Important Information – Quick Reference
We strongly urge that you read the information provided in pages referred hereunder which will help in road safety and prevent
inconvenience
1 Warranty Coverage............................................................................................................................................... Refer WI&MG* (P.g. 14)

2 Roadside Assistance ............................................................................................................................................ Refer WI&MG* (P.g. 9)
3 Schedule Service (Free/Paid)........................................................................................................................... Refer WI&MG* (P.g. 23)
4 Maintenance Schedule & Lubrication Chart...................................................................................... Refer WI&MG* (P.g. 24 & 28)
5 Location Of Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)...................................................................................... Refer (P.g. 2-23)
6 Location Of Fuse Box And Fuse Details........................................................................................................ Refer (P.g. 2-5)
7 Changing A Flat Tyre............................................................................................................................................. Refer (P.g. 2-13)
8 Understanding The Warning Lamps............................................................................................................. Refer (P.g. 4-5)
9 Understanding The Airbag Function.............................................................................................................. Refer (P.g. 7-1)
10 Use Of Seat Belts And Child Restraint....................................................................................................... Refer (P.g. 6-6 & 6-12)
11 Co driver lift and slide seat....................................................................................................... Refer (P.g. 6-4)
12 Convertible Soft Top.............................................................................................................. Refer (P.g. 9-23)
13 If Your Vehicle Is Submerged........................................................................................................................... Refer (P.g. 14-22)
14 Driving Through Water....................................................................................................................................... Refer (P.g. 14-23)
15 OFF Road Driving Precautions....................................................................................................................................... Refer (P.g. 14-22)
16 Opening And Closing The Hood..................................................................................................... Refer (P.g. 17-4)
17 Location Of Battery And Its Maintenance.................................................................................................. Refer (P.g. 17-6 & 17-18)
*Warranty Information & Maintenance Guide
Table of Contents
1 INTRODUCTION AND SAFETY PRECAUTIONS ........................ 1-1 Rear Overview......................................................................... 3-2

Introduction............................................................................. 1-1 Instrument Panel Overview ................................................. 3-3
Servicing and Summary Data ............................................. 1-2 4 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER OVERVIEW.......................................... 4-1
Safety Symbols ....................................................................... 1-2 Instrument Cluster ................................................................ 4-1
General Safety Information and Instructions .................. 1-3 Warning Lamps Overview – Diesel ................................... 4-2
To Owners of a Mahindra Vehicle...................................... 1-4 Warning Lamps .................................................................... 4-5
Audio/Infotainment Manual................................................ 1-7 5 EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM - Applicable for Diesel............ 5-1
2 GENERAL .......................................................................................... 2-1 Diesel Oxidation Catalyst (DOC).......................................... 5-1
Feature Matrix........................................................................ 2-1 Selective Catalytic Reduction(SCR).................................... 5-1
Dimensions.............................................................................. 2-4 Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF)............................................. 5-5
Bulb Specification .................................................................. 2-5 Alerts in Cluster ..................................................................... 5-7
Fuses and Relays ................................................................... 2-5 Regen Alerts ........................................................................... 5-9
Flat Tyre ................................................................................ 2-13 Instrument Cluster Tell-Tale ............................................ 5-10
Jack Points........................................................................... 2-16 Instrument Cluster Tell-Tale -Assames.......................... 5-12
Technical Specifications .................................................... 2-20 Instrument Cluster Tell-Tale -Bengali ............................. 5-14
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)................................ 2-23 Instrument Cluster Tell-Tale-Gujarathi ........................... 5-16
Engine Number ................................................................... 2-23 Instrument Cluster Tell-Tale-Hindi................................... 5-18
3 VEHICLE OVERVIEW....................................................................... 3-1 Instrument Cluster Tell-Tale-Kannada............................ 5-20
Front Overview........................................................................ 3-1 Instrument Cluster Tell-Tale-Malayalam........................ 5-22
Table of Contents
Instrument Cluster Tell-Tale-Marathi ............................. 5-24 Passenger Air Bag ON/OFF Instruction .......................... 7-3
Instrument Cluster Tell-Tale-Oriya................................... 5-26 Airbag System Malfunction Lamp ..................................... 7-4
Instrument Cluster Tell-Tale-Tamil .................................. 5-28 Airbag Inflation/Deployment .............................................. 7-5
Instrument Cluster Tell-Tale-Telugu................................ 5-30 Child Restraint and Airbag .................................................. 7-7
6 SEATS AND SEAT BELTS .............................................................. 6-1 Airbag Deployment ............................................................... 7-8
Driver seat............................................................................... 6-1 Airbag Non-deployment........................................................ 7-9
Head Restraint ....................................................................... 6-4 Airbag Replacement .......................................................... 7-11
Co-Driver Lift & Slide seat (If equipped) ............................ 6-4 Self Removal SRS Related Parts..................................... 7-11
Seat Belts ................................................................................ 6-6 Airbag Disposal ................................................................... 7-11
Fastening the Seat Belt........................................................ 6-9 Airbag Repair....................................................................... 7-12
Child Restraint System (CRS) Fitment using the seat Airbag Maintenance........................................................... 7-12
belt system........................................................................... 6-11 Airbag ECU Malfunction .................................................... 7-12
Child Restraint System (CRS) Installation Using ISOFIX 8 LOCKS AND KEYS .......................................................................... 8-1
& Top Tether ....................................................................... 6-16 Doors........................................................................................ 8-2
Warning for Child Restraint ............................................. 6-20 Central Locking System........................................................ 8-4
Cautions for ISOFIX Seat usage....................................... 6-21 Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System ................................ 8-6
7 SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) ......................... 7-1 Engine Immobiliser System .............................................. 8-11
Airbags ..................................................................................... 7-1 9 FEATURES AND CONTROL........................................................... 9-1
Driver and Front Passenger Airbag .................................. 7-2 Power Windows..................................................................... 9-1
Table of Contents
Rear Swing Gate .................................................................... 9-2 Convertible Soft Top Fold and Unfold ............................. 9-23
Outside Rear View Mirror (ORVM) .................................... 9-3 10 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER FEATURES ....................................... 10-1
Interior Mirror ........................................................................ 9-4 Instrument Cluster ............................................................. 10-1
Exterior Lamps ....................................................................... 9-4 Gear information................................................................. 10-5
Follow-Me Home (FMH) RKE............................................ 9-11 Outside Ambient Temperature (If equipped) ................ 10-5
Follow-Me Home (FMH) Non RKE ................................... 9-11 Instrument Cluster Control Switches ............................ 10-6
Lead Me to Vehicle (LMV) (RKE) ..................................... 9-12 Instrument Cluster Screen flow (If equipped) .............. 10-7
Interior Lamps..................................................................... 9-12 Drive Information ................................................................ 10-8
Power Outlet ........................................................................ 9-13 Drive Summary..................................................................10-10
AUX and USB Ports ........................................................... 9-15 Fuel Computer...................................................................10-11
Windshield Wipers............................................................. 9-15 Digital Speedometer ........................................................10-12
Utility Holders ...................................................................... 9-18 Vehicle Information...........................................................10-13
Grip Handle and Coat Hook .............................................. 9-19 Warning History................................................................10-14
Horn ....................................................................................... 9-20 Settings ...............................................................................10-15
Speakers & Tweeters ........................................................ 9-21 Warning / Tell-tale Lamps in the Instrument Cluster
Washable floor mats (If equipped) ................................. 9-21 – Diesel ..............................................................................10-22
Switch Bank (If equipped).................................................. 9-21 Warning Lamps in the Instrument Cluster ................10-25
Voice Messaging System(VMS) (If equipped)............... 9-22 11 REVERSE PARKING ASSIST SYSTEM (RPAS)....................... 11-1
Roof Tops ............................................................................. 9-22 RPAS Sensors ..................................................................... 11-1
Table of Contents
Driving and Operation ........................................................ 11-2 Defogging/De-misting and Defrosting .......................... 13-8
RPAS Information on Instrument Cluster ..................... 11-2 Manual – HVAC Controls (if equipped).......................... 13-9
Operation of RPAS.............................................................. 11-3 HVAC Air Filter (Cabin Air Filter) ...................................13-13
Pay Attention ....................................................................... 11-4 Rapid Cabin Cooling..........................................................13-14
Limitations of RPAS............................................................ 11-7 Rapid Cabin Heating.........................................................13-14
12 STEERING AND BRAKES............................................................ 12-1 Defogging/De-misting and Defrosting ........................13-15
Steering................................................................................. 12-1 14 STARTING AND DRIVING THE VEHICLE ................................. 14-1
Tilt Steering .......................................................................... 12-2 Safety Tips - Before Starting your Vehicle..................... 14-1
Steering Controls - Audio Control System (if Ignition Switch...................................................................... 14-2
equipped) .............................................................................. 12-3 Pedals.................................................................................... 14-3
Brakes ................................................................................... 12-4 Starting the Engine............................................................. 14-3
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ........................................ 12-6 Stopping the Engine ........................................................... 14-5
Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD) (if Manual Transmission ........................................................ 14-5
equipped) .............................................................................. 12-7 Automatic Transmission................................................... 14-8
13 HEATING, VENTILATION AND AIR-CONDITIONING SYSTEM Electronic Stability Program (ESP) (if equipped) .......14-17
(HVAC) (If equipped) .................................................................... 13-1 Traction Control System (TCS) (if equipped) .............14-19
HVAC Overview.................................................................... 13-2 Driving Your Vehicle .........................................................14-20
Center/Side Vents............................................................. 13-3 4WD System ....................................................................14-25
HVAC Controls (if equipped)............................................. 13-4 Hill Descent Control (HDC) (if equipped) .....................14-29
Table of Contents
Hill Hold Control (HHC) (if equipped).............................14-31 General Owners Information............................................ 17-1
Cruise Control (if equipped) ............................................14-31 Opening/Closing the Hood............................................... 17-4
Fuel-BS VI............................................................................14-34 Identifying Components in the Engine Compartment -
Tips for Better Fuel Economy.........................................14-37 Diesel ..................................................................................... 17-6
15 WHEELS AND TYRES ................................................................. 15-1 General Maintenance ........................................................ 17-9
Tyre Information.................................................................. 15-1 In the Engine Compartment ...........................................17-10
Tyre Rating ........................................................................... 15-1 Maintenance - Inside the Vehicle ..................................17-18
Tyre Label (Vehicle Placard)............................................. 15-2 Maintenance - Outside the Vehicle ...............................17-18
Tyre Pressure...................................................................... 15-3 Battery.................................................................................17-19
Tyre Rotation Recommendations ................................... 15-6 Appearance Care and Protection.................................17-20
Tiretronics (if equipped) .................................................... 15-8 Air Conditioning System Maintenance.........................17-34
16 EMERGENCIES.............................................................................. 16-1 Vehicle Storage .................................................................17-34
Hazard Warning Lamp...................................................... 16-1 Winter Care .......................................................................17-34
Vehicle Does not Start - Checks...................................... 16-1 Bulb Replacement ............................................................17-36
Engine Overheating............................................................. 16-2
Jump Starting...................................................................... 16-3
Towing ................................................................................... 16-6
Limp Home Mode ............................................................... 16-9
17 MAINTENANCE ............................................................................ 17-1
INTRODUCTION AND SAFETY PRECAUTIO NS
1 INTRODUCTION AND SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

1.1 Introduction
Dear Customer,
Congratulations on purchasing your M a h i n d r a T H A R . Your vehicle is designed to provide years of safe and dependable service, as long as it is
used and maintained in accordance with the instructions provided in this manual.
All persons who will use and/or maintain this vehicle should read, understand and follow all the warnings and instructions provided in this
manual. This Owner's Manual should be considered as an integral part of the vehicle and should remain with the vehicle. However, nothing in
this manual, and none of the safety devices installed in the vehicle, are a substitute for careful operation and common sense. Always make
sure that your vehicle is in optimum working condition, and take note of the road and weather conditions in which you are using your vehicle.
If you have any questions regarding the proper use or maintenance of your vehicle ; please call your Authorized Mahindra Dealer.
Alternatively you can contact us at,
• 1800-209-6006 (Toll free)
• customercare@mahindra.com
We extend our best wishes for safe and pleasurable motoring.
Sincerely,
MAHINDRA & MAHINDRA LTD.
© Copyright Mahindra and Mahindra Ltd. 112020 1-1

INTRODUCTION AND SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
1.2 Servicing and Summary Data
• For any issues concerning the vehicle and for any spare parts, WARNING indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if
contact only the Authorized Mahindra network not avoided, could result in death or serious injury.
• We recommend you should always use genuine Mahindra spare
parts when performing repairs on the vehicle
CAUTION indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if
• We suggest that you record the vehicle data in the Warranty
not avoided, may result in minor or moderate injury and/or
Information & Maintenance Guide for future references
property damage.
1.3 Safety Symbols

Carefully read, understand and follow the safety symbols/ NOTICE indicates important information relevant to the vehicle,
instructions given in this manual.
the vehicle's use or to sections of this manual to which
particular attention must be paid for optimum use of the
Legend of the Symbols vehicle.
To emphasize information and procedures regarding safety, use, If you see this symbol, it indicates “no”, “do not,” “do not do this,” or
maintenance, etc., the following symbols are used throughout the “never”.
manual.
DANGER indicates an imminently hazardous situation which, if

not avoided, will result in death or serious injury.
1-2 © Copyright Mahindra and Mahindra Ltd. 112020

1.4 General Safety Information and Instructions 6. Inspect the seat belt system periodically, checking for cuts,
frays or wear in the seat belt webbing, or loose buckles,
retractors, anchors or other loose parts. Damaged parts must
be replaced immediately
Failure to follow the warnings and instructions provided in this 7. Always start and operate the engine in a well-ventilated area. If
manual could result in failure of the vehicle, an accident and/or in an enclosed area, vent the exhaust to the outside. Do not
serious personal injury. modify or tamper with the exhaust system
1. Carefully read, understand and follow the warnings and 8. Examine tyres for excessive tread wear and uneven wear
instructions given in this manual. This manual is an essential patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects lodged
part of the product. Keep it in the vehicles glove box for future in the tread and check sidewalls for any cuts, cracks, or other
reference signs of wear. Replace as necessary
2. First aid kit placed in the glove box of the vehicle. Ensure it is 9. Always maintain the safety labels affixed to your vehicle in a
not taken out of the vehicle at any point of time. good legible condition
3. Please note that throughout this manual, reference is made 10. All signal lamps, buzzers, shields, guards and other protective
that “an accident” could occur. An accident could cause you or safety devices must always remain in place and in good, proper
a bystander to sustain personal injury, or result in property working condition
damage
11. The life span of Mahindra products depend on many factors.
4. Never use a mobile phone or any device with headphone while Improper use, abuse or harsh use in general may compromise
driving. This may take your focus off the road and lead to the integrity of the vehicle and significantly reduce its life span.
accidents The vehicle is also subject to wear over a period of time. Please
5. Please be advised that many service and repair tasks require have your vehicle regularly inspected by an Authorized
specialized knowledge, tools and experience. General Mahindra Dealer or a qualified mechanic. If the inspection
mechanical aptitude may not be sufficient to properly service reveals any damage or excessive wear, immediately replace or
or repair your vehicle. If you have any doubt whatsoever have the component serviced
regarding the ability to properly service or repair your vehicle, 12. We recommend that you use only genuine parts supplied by
please contact your Authorized Mahindra Dealer or a qualified Mahindra. The use of non-Mahindra parts will not be covered
technician by warranty

13. Never crawl under or be in close proximity to the vehicle when 1.5 To Owners of a Mahindra Vehicle
it is lifted off the ground (by a jack), unless the vehicle is
properly supported with jack stands, wheel chocks and other When first driving the vehicle after long periods of non-use, you may
appropriate safety devices experience temporary drive disturbance. This is a characteristic of
14. Never attempt any repairs or adjustments to any component the tyres and should be no reason for concern. The condition
while the vehicle is in motion. Always switch off the engine, and should correct itself within 5-15 kms. of driving. If the disturbance
wait for the engine to come to a complete stop before persists, have the tyres checked by an Authorized Mahindra Dealer.
performing any repairs or adjustments Driving and Alcohol
15. The vehicle identification plates are the only legal identification
reference, hence it is necessary to keep them in good Your driving ability can be seriously impaired by alcohol even if the
condition. Never modify data on the plates or remove them. blood alcohol level is far below the legal minimum. Drunken driving
The customer is responsible for any possible tampering with is one of the most frequent causes of accidents.
the plates, which will immediately void the warranty
16. Do not attempt sharp turns, abrupt maneuvers, or other
unsafe driving actions that can cause loss of vehicle control. Never drink and drive. Drinking and driving will lead to an
When the vehicle is fully loaded, drive at a slow speed, accident resulting in serious personal injury.
especially when turning. Note that the centre of gravity of the
Driving and Drugs/Medication
vehicle changes when the vehicle is fully loaded , and also if
luggage is mounted on the roof carrier Your driving ability can be seriously impaired through the use of
prescription or non-prescription drugs or medication (even cough
syrup). If you are taking any sort of drug or medication, be sure that
Do not sit or load the flat portion of front bumper. It is not it will not affect your driving ability.
designed to carry external load & can break without warning. Mobile Phones Warning
Use of electronic devices such as mobile phones, computers,

portable radios or other by the driver while driving is dangerous. In
exceptional condition if use of a mobile phone is necessary despite

this warning, use a handsfree system to ensure that the hands are Mahindra genuine parts will help retain emission performance of
free to drive the vehicle. Even handsfree do not ensure that an the vehicle and is a pre-requisite for emissions warranty coverage.
accident will not happen due to distraction.
Servicing
Please comply with the legal regulations concerning the use of
communication equipment in vehicles in your country. If you have any questions concerning the proper use or
maintenance of your vehicle, please call your Authorized Mahindra
Driving Long Distances Dealer. A list of dealers can be found on the WITH YOU HAMESHA -
Site / APP can be referred.
When you are driving over long distances, follow these tips so that
you have a safe journey; Alternatively you can contact us on 1800-209-6006 /
customercare@mahindra.com.
• Lack of sleep or fatigue will impact your ability to drive safely.
Running-in
• Exercise your eyes by shifting the focus of your eyes to different
parts of the road. Driving smoothly during first 1000 kms. will help to prevent
• Use stimulating beverages such as coffee or tea. abnormal and premature system wear . Proper running in will be
improving the life of drivetrain and vehicle components.
• Relax and stay calm.
A new engine may consume more oil during the first 1000 kms. of
• Take breaks at regular intervals running. This should be considered as a normal part of break-in and
Protecting Our Environment not interpreted as any problem with the engine.
All of us should play our part in protecting our environment. Mahindra Genuine Parts
Judicious vehicle usage and ensuring hazardous waste disposal Mahindra uses high quality parts for building the vehicles.
(including cleaning and lubrication fluids) are important steps
towards this initiative. In the event that any parts need replacement, we recommend that
you use only Mahindra genuine parts.
Mahindra vehicles confirm to existing emission norms (standards).
Adhering to the periodical maintenance schedule and using Non-Mahindra parts may harm vehicle performance and will not be
covered by your Mahindra warranty.

To avoid counterfeit parts and to protect our brand image,

Mahindra genuine parts are packed in a branded carton. Look for
the “Mahindra Genuine Parts” logo. For maximum vehicle performance and safety considerations
always keep the following information in mind.
• The company does not take any responsibility for
consequential damages / injuries resulting due to fitment of
unauthorised aftermarket accessories and / or tapping /
cutting wires in the wiring harness
Any unauthorized modifications or alterations to this vehicle or • When adding accessories, equipment, passengers and
failure to use appropriate specification and quality spare parts luggage to your vehicle, do not exceed the total weight
could seriously affect vehicle road worthiness and safety capacity of the vehicle or of the front and rear axle. Consult
leading to an accident, resulting in serious injury Mahindra authorized dealer for specific weight information.
Mahindra Genuine Accessories • Bull bars and nudge guards are not recommended for
A wide selection of quality accessories is available through your variants with an airbag.
authorized Mahindra dealership. These accessories have been • Accessories causing any change in vehicle specifications like
specifically engineered to allow you to personalize your vehicle to wheel rims, bull bars, etc., may affect the performance of
suit your requirements and compliment its style and aerodynamic safety systems.
appearance.
• Mobile communication systems such as two way radios,
Each accessory is made from high quality materials and meets telephones and theft alarms that are equipped with radio
Mahindra's rigid engineering and safety specifications. Every transmitters and installed in your vehicle should comply with
Mahindra accessory installed according to the Mahindra the local regulations and should be installed only by a your
installation provisions comes with the respective accessory Authorized Mahindra Dealer
warranty.
Consult your Mahindra authorized dealer for detailed information
about accessories available for your specific model variant.

Vehicle Safety DISCLAIMER:
When leaving your vehicle unoccupied; All the information displays in Adventure Statistics are to induce the
• Always remove the ignition key when you park the vehicle Adventure Spirit of user in good faith and for general information
purpose only.
• Close all the windows completely and lock all the doors
• Do not leave any valuables in your vehicle. If you must leave M&M does not make any warranties about the completeness,
something in your vehicle, hide them and securely lock all the reliability and accuracy of this information. Any action you take upon
doors the information, is strictly at your own risk.
M&M will not be liable for any losses and/or damages in

1.6 Audio/Infotainment Manual connection with the use of this feature.
Please refer the user e-manual in infotainment for details regarding:

• Audio/Infotainment functions
• Bluetooth functions
• Hands free usage

GENERAL
2 GENERAL
2.1 Feature Matrix
In view of our policy of continuously improving our products, we reserve the right to alter specifications, designs or features without prior
notice and without any liability.
We recommend you contact the nearest Authorised Mahindra Dealer for the latest features applicable to your vehicle.
AX AC AX OPT AX OPT LX MT LX MT LX AT LX AT
Feature
4S ST 4S CT 4S HT 4S CT 4S HT 4S CT 4S HT
Technology
Hybrid Monochrome Analog Tacho & Speedo
� � �
Cluster
Cluster with 3.5 Inch Colour TFT � � � �
Immobiliser � � � � � � �
Voice Message System (VMS) * � � � �
Manual Central Locking System � � � � � � �
Central Locking with Remote access � � � � � �
18 cm (7”) Color Touch Screen Infotainment

Display, USB/AUX , Bluetooth, Navigation. � � � �
Follow me home lamp � � � � � � �

GENERAL
Feature
Lead me to vehicle lamp � � � �
Front Fog Lamp � � � �
Apple Car Play � � � �
Android Auto � � � �
Ecosense with GSI in cluster � � � �
Blue Sense (App Control + Smart Watch) � � � �
Safety
Driver and Co-Driver Air Bag � � � � � � �
Seat Belt Reminder � � � � � � �
ABS with EBD � � � � � � �
ESP with Active traction control � � � �
Tiretronics � � � �
Reverse Park Assist System (RPAS) � � � � � � �
ISOFIX/Belted Baby Seat (2nd Row) � � � � � � �
Seat Belt Reminder (Drvr/Codrvr) � � � � � � �
Style
Wheel Size 16” 16” 16” 18” 18” 18” 18”

GENERAL
Feature
Wheel Type STEEL STEEL STEEL ALLOY ALLOY ALLOY ALLOY
Comfort & Convenience
Tiltable Steering column � � � � � � �
Collapsible Steering column � � � � � � �
Cruise Control � � � �
Back rest with map pocket � � � � � � �
Seat Height Adjustment (Manual) � � � � � �
Lumbar Support � � � �
Internally Adjustable Power ORVM � � � �
Power Steering � � � � � � �
Power Windows – Front Doors � � � � � � �
Steering Mounted Controls � � � �
* – If equipped

GENERAL
2.2 Dimensions 2.2.3 Side View
2.2.1 Front View
1920
2450
3985
W52B04
1520
2040 DIMEN- AX AX AX
W52B01 LX MT LX MT LX AT LX AT
SION & AC OPT OPT
4S CT 4S HT 4S CT 4S HT
WEIGHTS 4S ST 4S CT 4S HT
2.2.2 Rear View Wheel Base 2450 mm
Overall
Length 3985 mm
Overall 1820
1855 mm
width mm
Overall
Height 1837mm to 1920 mm
Front and
1520 mm
Rear Track
The specifications are for reference only. Subject to change
1520
W52B02 without prior notice

GENERAL
2.3 Bulb Specification 2.4 Fuses and Relays
Lamp Bulb Wattage A fuse is the most common electric protection device. The fuse is
placed in an electrical circuit, so that when current flow exceeds
Head Lamp 12V H4 55/60W the rating of the circuit/fuse, it blows off. The element in the fuse
Park lamp 12V W5W melts, opening the circuit and preventing other components of the
circuit from being damaged by the over current. The size of the
Front Turn lamp 12V PY21W metal fuse element determines the rating. Once a fuse blows off, it
Front Fog lamp 12V H16-19W must be replaced with a new one of the same rating.
Side Turn Signal lamp 12V W5W Switch the ignition and all electrical equipment OFF before touching
LED: DRL 4.86W, For Position or attempting to change a fuse.
DRL/Position lamp
0.54W
Tail / Stop lamp LED: Stop 6.8W, Rear Position

0.9W Replacement fuse must be with the same rating as the one you
Rear Turn lamp 12V WY16W have removed.
Front Position Lamp 12V W5W
Reverse lamp 12V W16W
You can identify a blown fuse by a break in the filament. All
Registration Plate lamp LED: 0.3W fuses except high current fuses are press fit.
Never touch fuses with bare hands. Always use the fuse puller
to remove and refit the fuses.
Be careful while removing the relay, to avoid damage to relay
terminal — do not shake or apply excessive force .

GENERAL
There are 3 fuse boxes in the vehicle; NOT USED NOT USED 10A
4WD ACTUATOR NOT USED
F34 F42 F50 F58
• Instrument Panel Fuse Box
NOT USED 5A 15A AT ECU B+ * 5A *
ABS IGN AT ECU IGN
• Engine Compartment Fuse Box F35 F43 F51 F59
• Battery Mounted Fuse Box 5A 5A AIR BAG IGN

10A IC/HVAC/ 5A
ROOF LAMP MBFM/CENTER EMS ECU IGN
F36 F44 FASCIA F52 F60
2.4.1 Instrument Panel Fuse Box 10A 5A INFO IGN

* 5A
INFO IGN
* 20A
POWER WINDOW
PARK
F37 F45 F53 F61
• Pull the Fuse box cover below the switch bank, outward to ORVM/RD/ 10A 5A
5A 10A COMBI SW REV LAMP
access the instrument panel fuse box CRANK
& TGS
IMMO IGN
F38 LIGHT F46 F54 F62
15A 5A NOT USED 15A

INFO B+/ IC/HVAC B+ POWER SOCKET
AUDIO B+ F39 F47 F55 F63
Spare fuses are available in this fuse box location.
5A 5A 5A
DIAGNOSTIC IMMO B+ NOT USED MBFM ACC
F40 F48 F56 F64
20A 20A 25A WIPER/

20A MBFM BATT-1 MBFM BATT-3 COMBI SW
MBFM BATT-2
25 20 20 25
F41 F49 F57 WIPER F65
5 5
3 5 5
15
2
1
5 5 15
5 10 10 5
20 10 10 10
5 10 5
5
10
W52B07 W52B05

GENERAL
Fuse No Fuse Rating Circuit Fuse No Fuse Rating Circuit

F34 – – F52 10A IC/HVAC/MBFM/CENTER FASCIA
F35 – – F53 5A INFO ACC*
F36 5A ROOF LAMP F54 10A REV LAMP & TGS
F37 10A PARK F55 – –
F38 5A CRANK F56 _ _
F39 15A INFO B+/AUDIO B+ F57 20A MBFM BATT-3
F40 5A DIAGNOSTIC F58 – –
F41 20A MBFM BATT-2 F59 5A AT ECU IGN*
F42 – – F60 5A EMS ECU IGN
F43 5A ABS IGN F61 20A POWER WINDOW
F44 5A AIR BAG IGN F62 5A IMMO IGN
F45 5A INFO IGN* F63 15A POWER SOCKET
F46 10A ORVM/RD/COMBI SW LIGHT F64 5A MBFM ACC
F47 5A IC/HVAC B+ F65 25A WIPER/COMBI SW WIPER
F48 5A IMMO B+ * - If equippd
F49 20A MBFM BATT-1
F50 10A 4WD ACTUATOR
F51 15A AT ECU B+*

GENERAL
2.4.2 Engine Compartment Fuse Box The engine compartment fuse box is located adjacent to the
vehicle’s battery.
Follow the below steps to remove the fuse cover;
• To open the fuse box cover, press the lock and push the cover
back and lift it.
Fuse puller is available in the fuse box cover.
W52B08
15
10
15
5
10
10
10
40
60
40
20
15
30
15
10
40
40
60
40
09
30
15
15
15
15
30 20 15 10 5
012-HSTM-D
HFV7
RM-299021
12V 20A
12V 20A
RM-299021
12V 20A
RM-299021
12V 20A
RM-299021
12V 20A
RM-299021
RM-299021
RM-299021
RM-299021
RM-299021
12V 20A
12V 20A
12V 20A
12V 20A
W52B09

GENERAL
For Diesel Engine Fuse No Fuse Rating Circuit

F1 50A BATT-1
5A
SPARE 15A 10A 15A NOT USED EMS F2 50A GLOW PLUG
60A F5 HFM
F11 F33
EMS B-2 F30 ECU B+
* - BASE ON F32 F31 F29
APPLICABILITY 15A 10A 10A F3 40A BATT-2
SPARE NOT USED NOT USED
F10 40A AC COMP BRAKE FUSE EMS B-1
F28 F27 F26 F25 F24
F4 40A STARTER
60A 40A 20A 15A
F5 40A ABS MOTOR
40A COOLING BLOWER 20A 5A 5A 10A 30A
REAR AC COMP EMS ECU
BATT-3
F9
FAN MOTOR FUEL PUMP
F23 DEFOG B+
SCR
F20
DRL
F19
F18
REAR FOG
F17 F8
F6 30A EMS ECU
F8 F7 F22 F21
40A
F7 40A BLOWER MOTOR
25A 40A 40A 50A 50A
ABS 10A 20A 15A 15A
ABS
MOTOR SOLENOID
FRONT FOG HORN H/L LOW H/L HI STARTER
F4
BATT-2
F3
GLOW PLUG
F2
BATT-1
F1
F8 60A COOLING FAN
F5 F15 F14 F13 F12
F16
F9 40A BATT-3
SPARE SPARE SPARE SPARE SPARE SPARE
25A 20A 15A 10A 10A 5A F10 – –
F11 – –
R10 R16 R9
FUEL PUMP GLOW PLUG HORN R15
F12 15A H/L HI
F13 15 H/L LOW
F14 20A HORN
R14 R13 R12 R11 F15 10A FRONT FOG*
NOT USED STARTER EMS ECU BLOWER
F16 25A ABS SOLENOID
R8 R6 R5
R4 R3
R2
F17 10A REAR FOG*
R7 REAR FRONT R1
BRAKE REAR FOG SCR RELAY AC COMP D’STER FOG
H/L LOW H/L HI F18 – –
LAMP
F19 5A DRL*
F20 5A SCR*
F21 15A AC COMP B+

GENERAL
Fuse No Fuse Rating Circuit Relay No Circuit

F22 20A REAR DEFOG* R3 FRONT FOG*
F23 20A FUEL PUMP R4 REAR D’STER*
F24 – – R5 AC COMP
F25 – – R6 SCR RELAY*
F26 10A EMS B-1 R7 REAR FOG*
F27 10A BRAKE FUSE R8 BRAKE LAMP*
F28 15A AC COMP R9 Horn
F29 5A EMS ECU B+ R10 FUEL PUMP
F30 – – R11 BLOWER
F31 15A EMS B-2 R12 EMS ECU
F32 10A HFM 13 STARTER
F33 15A F5 14 –
60A, 40A, 25A, 20A, 15 –
SPARE
15A, 10A, 10A, 5A 16 GLOW PLUG
Relay No Circuit
R1 H/L HI
R2 H/L LOW

GENERAL
For Petrol Engine Fuse No Fuse Rating Circuit

F1 50A BATT-1
5A
15A 15A 15A
SPARE
60A
VBR_F VBR_E VBR_D
EMS F2 — —
F11 ECU B+
* - BASE ON F33 F32 F31 F30 F29
APPLICABILITY
10A 10A 30A 10A
F3 40A BATT-2
SPARE
F10 40A VBR_C VBR_B VBR_A VBR_G
F28 F27 F26 F25 F24
F4 40A STARTER
60A 40A 20A 15A
F5 40A ABS MOTOR
40A COOLING BLOWER 20A 5A 10A 40A
REAR AC COMP EMS ECU
BATT-3
F9
FAN MOTOR FUEL PUMP
F23 DEFOG B+ F20
DRL
F19
F18
REAR FOG
F17 F8
F6 40A EMS ECU
F8 F7 F22 F21
40A
F7 40A BLOWER MOTOR
25A 40A 40A 50A
ABS 10A 20A 15A 15A
ABS
MOTOR SOLENOID
FRONT FOG HORN H/L LOW H/L HI STARTER
F4
BATT-2
F3 F2
BATT-1
F1
F8 60A COOLING FAN
F5 F15 F14 F13 F12
F16
F9 40A BATT-3
SPARE SPARE SPARE SPARE SPARE SPARE
30A 25A 20A 15A 10A 5A F10 – –
F11 – –
R10 R9
FUEL PUMP R16 HORN R15
F12 15A H/L HI
F13 15A H/L LOW
F14 20A HORN
R13 R12 R11 F15 10A FRONT FOG*
R14 STARTER EMS ECU BLOWER
F16 25A ABS SOLENOID
R8 R6 R5
R4 R3
R2
F17 10A REAR FOG*
R7 REAR FRONT R1
BRAKE AC COMP H/L LOW
LAMP
REAR FOG AIR COOLER D’STER FOG H/L HI F18 – –
F19 5A DRL*
F20 — —
F21 15A AC COMP B+

GENERAL
Fuse No Fuse Rating Circuit Relay No Circuit

F22 20A REAR DEFOG* R1 H/L HI
F23 20A FUEL PUMP R2 H/L LOW
F24 – – R3 FRONT FOG*
F25 10A VBR_G R4 REAR D’STER*
F26 30A VBR_A R5 AC COMP
F27 10A VBR_B R6 AIR COOLER
F28 10A VBR_C R7 REAR FOG*
F29 5A EMS ECU B+ R8 BRAKE LAMP*
F30 – – R9 Horn
31 15A VBR_D R10 FUEL PUMP
32 15A VBR_E R11 BLOWER
33 15A VBR_F R12 EMS ECU
40, 60, 30A, 25A, 13 STARTER

SPARE –
20A, 15A,, 10A, 5A R14
*- If equipped R15 –
R16 —

GENERAL
2.4.3 Battery Mounted Fuse Box 2.5 Flat Tyre
The battery mounted fuse box is connected to the positive terminal Reduce your speed gradually, keeping a straight line. Move
of the battery. Functionality of battery mounted fuse box is to cautiously off the road to a safe place well away from traffic. Park
provide short circuit protection to alternator and power supply to on a level spot with firm ground. Stop the engine and switch ON
main engine compartment fuse box. your hazard warning flashers.
Firmly apply the parking brake. Have everyone come out of the
vehicle on the side away from traffic.
After stopping , use the hazard warning triangle to alert the
oncoming traffic of the stopped vehicle
Never stop your vehicle in a traffic lane to change a tyre. Keep

driving until you reach a safe location.
W52B10
The jack provided along with the vehicle is to be used only for
Battery mounted fuse box consist of following fuses: changing a spare tyre. It is never to be used to perform any other
• Main charging fuse – 150A (Pink colour) maintenance or repair on the vehicle.
• Bus bar fuse - 80A (White colour)

Never place any part of your body under any portion of the
vehicle when it is supported only by the jack. You could be
crushed by the vehicle if it falls off a jack. Keep bystander’s
away from the vehicle.

GENERAL
Find level, solid ground that is clear of oncoming traffic. If you

cannot find a safe place to stop, it is better to drive on a flat tyre
and damage the rim than it is to risk being hit by oncoming traffic.
After changing a flat tyre, never store the tyre or other equipment A
in the passenger compartment of the vehicle. This loose equipment B
could strike an occupant in the event of a sudden stop or collision.
Store all of these items in the proper place.
The following sections outline the procedure for changing a flat tyre;
W52B12
2.5.1 Jack To open the tool kit lid assembly (B), rotate the lid screw (A) anti
clockwise direction to remove the tool kit lid assembly.
Jack Removing Procedure
Remove the jack assembly.
The jack assembly is located behind the rear seat on the floor.
Refix the jack assembly and close the tool kit lid assembly and
rotate the lid screw clockwise direction to close.
W52B11
Lift the floor mat provided in the luggage compartment

Tool kit is located below the rear seat.

GENERAL
The tool kit consists of, • Slowly support and lower the spare wheel
• Screw Driver
2.5.3 Wheel Nut Loosening
• Wheel Spanner
Always loosen the wheel nut before raising the vehicle. Turn the
• Jack Operating Lever wheel nut counter clockwise to loosen as per the crisscross
• DEO Spanner 10mm x 12mm sequence shown. To get maximum leverage, fit the spanner to the
nut so that the handle is on the left side. Grab the spanner near the
• Wrench tool for Water drain in fuel end of the handle and push down on the handle. Be careful that the
spanner does not slip off the nut. Do not remove the nut, but loosen
them by one or two turns.
2.5.2 Spare Wheel Removal
4 1
2
5 3
W52B13
The spare wheel is mounted on the rear end of the vehicle. It is held
in place by a securing nuts. Do not apply force with your legs (or stand) on the wheel
spanner while loosening/tightening the wheel nuts.
• Loosen and remove the securing nut counter clockwise with a
wheel spanner

GENERAL
2.6 Jack Points R e a r j a c k u p p o i n t - On either side of the rear axle.
F r o n t j a c k u p p o i n t - On the chassis long member behind the front

wheels.
W52B20
2.6.1 Jacking
Position the jack at the correct jacking point. Make sure the jack is
positioned on a level and solid ground. Ensure that no one is in the
vehicle.
Block the wheel diagonally opposing the flat tyre to keep the vehicle
from rolling when it is jacked up. While blocking the wheel, place a
wheel block in front of one of the front wheels or behind one of the
rear wheels.

GENERAL
• Do not raise the jack with any person inside the vehicle
• When raising the vehicle, do not place any objects on top of
or underneath the jack
• Raise the vehicle only high enough to remove and change
the wheel
• Follow jacking instructions
B
A • Do not start or run the engine while your vehicle is
U42B39
supported by the jack
A Flat Tyre B Chock Blocks
To raise the vehicle, insert the jack handle end along with the Never get under the vehicle when the vehicle is supported by
extension into the jack and turn it clockwise with the jack handle. As the jack alone.
the jack touches the vehicle and begins to lift, check that it is
properly positioned. Raise it high enough so that the spare tyre can Remove the wheel nuts. Remove the flat tyre straight off and then
be installed. Remember that you will need more ground clearance place it aside. Roll the spare wheel into position and align the holes
when putting the inflated spare tyre than when removing the flat of the disc/drum with the nuts. Lift the wheel and hand tighten the
tyre. top wheel nut. Wiggle the wheel and press it back over the other
nuts.
Re-install the wheel nut with the tapered end inward and tighten by
Make sure to locate the jack properly in the jacking point. hand. Press the wheel inward and tighten the wheel nuts further.
Raising the vehicle with an improperly positioned jack will
damage the underbody of the vehicle and may allow the vehicle Before lowering the wheel hand tighten the nuts in diagonal
to fall off the jack and cause personal injury. sequence so that wheel is flush against the hub/drum
• Use the jack only for lifting the vehicle during wheel changing

GENERAL
4 1
2
5 3
Never use oil or grease on the bolts or nuts. Doing so may lead Firmly tighten the wheel nuts as per the sequence shown in the
to over tightening of the nuts, wheel bolts spanner slip, damage illustration , two to three times.
the nuts and also may cause personal injuries. Also, nuts may
loosen and the wheels may fall off, which could cause a serious
accident. If there is oil or grease on any bolt or nut, clean before
installing wheel nuts. Improperly or loosely tightened wheel nuts are dangerous. The
wheel can wobble or come off. This can result in loss of vehicle
Lower the vehicle completely and tighten the diagonally opposite control and cause a serious accident. Always make sure all the
wheel nuts using the wheel nuts spanner. Turn the jack handle wheel nuts are properly/securely tightened to the specified
extension anti clockwise using the jack handle to lower the vehicle, torque.
making sure the handle remains firmly fitted onto the jack handle When lowering the vehicle, make sure all portions of your body
extension. Make sure the wheel spanner is securely engaged over are clear off the vehicle as it is lowered to the ground. Have the
the nut. Tighten each nut a little at a time in the diagonally opposite wheel nuts tightened with the torque spanner to 120 Nm, as
order as shown. Repeat the process until all the nuts are tight. Do soon as possible after changing wheels.
not use any other tools or any additional leverage other than your
hands, such as a hammer, pipe or your foot.

GENERAL
If you have rotated, repaired, changed your tyres or changed Wheel balancing to be done after tyre puncture rework.
the wheel rims, retorque the wheel nuts after driving about
1,000 kms (Torque 120 Nm).
2.6.2 Restore the Tools, Jack and Flat Tyre Securely
Put the wheel cap (if equipped) into position aligning the nozzle on
the wheel to the nozzle clearance on the wheel cover. Tap it firmly Restore the tools and jack back to their respective locations. Mount
on the sides with your hand to snap it into place. the flat tyre to the back door bracket at the rear of the vehicle.
Firmly tighten the securing nuts. Double check to ensure the tyre is
Check the air pressure of the replaced tyre. If the pressure is lower snug against the back door of the vehicle.
than recommended, drive slowly to the nearest service station and
inflate to the correct pressure. If it is too high, adjust it until it is
correct. Always reinstall the valve cap after checking or adjusting
tyre pressure. If the cap is not replaced, dirt and moisture could get It is recommended to fix the flat tyre at the nearest tyre shop
into the valve core and cause air leakage. If you lose a valve cap, buy and swap the spare wheel back. The wheel balance and
another and install it as soon as possible. alignment differ from wheel to wheel which may lead to
difference in steering and braking.

GENERAL
2.7 Technical Specifications
Technical Specifications
Diesel Petrol
Engine
Model 2.2 L mHawk Diesel Gen-II 2.0 L TGDi Petrol (G20)
Displacement/Cubic Capacity 2184 CC 1997 CC
Type Compression Ignition, 4 Stroke, DI Turbocharged Intercooler Spark Ignition, 4 Stroke, DI Turbocharged
Intercooler
Bore x Stroke 84 x 98.5 83 x 92.25
No of Cylinders 4 4
Max. Engine Output 97 KW @ 3750 rpm (For AT & MT) 112 KW @ 5000 rpm
300 Nm @ 1250 - 3000 rpm (For MT)
Max. Torque (Nm @ rpm) 300 Nm @ 1600 - 2800 rpm (For AT & MT)
320 Nm @ 1500 - 3000 rpm (For AT)
CLUTCH
Type Single Plate, Dry Diaphragm type

GENERAL
Diesel Petrol
TRANSMISSION
6 Speed Manual Transmission
Type
6 Speed Automatic Transmission
No. of Gears 6 Forward, 1 Reverse
GEAR RATIOS
Manual Transmission Automatic Transmission Automatic Transmission
I 3.963 3.60 3.60
II 2.210 2.090 2.090
III 1.422 1.488 1.488
IV 1.000 1.00 1.00
V 0.799 0.687 0.687
VI 0.716 0.58 0.58
Reverse 3.553 3.732 3.732
AXLES
Front /Rear Axle Ratio 4.3 : 1
WHEELS & TYRES
Rim R16: 6.5J X 16, R18: 7.5J X 18
Tyres 245/75 R16 & 255/65 R18
STEERING
Type/Description Rack and Pinion Type, Power Assisted - Hydraulic

GENERAL
Diesel Petrol
SUSPENSION
Front Double wishbone type IFS
Rear Multi link Coil spring suspension
Shock absorbers Telescopic (Front/Rear)
BRAKES
Service Brake Hydraulic & Vacuum assisted servo
Front Disc
Rear Drum
Parking Brake Internal expanding type on rear wheels
FUEL
Fuel Capacity 57 +/— 2 Litres
Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) 20 Litres NA
Capacity
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
System Voltage 12V
Battery Rating 65Ah

GENERAL
2.8 Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) plate is located on the below the
driver seat. Open the velcro and will find the VIN number.
2.9 Engine Number
U XXXXXXXXXXXX
MODEL
S XXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXX
Engine number sticker available on vacuum pump cover near Turbo
charger. Engraving Engine number location is available on engine
Block crankcase near starter motor.

VEHICL E OVERVIEW
3 VEHICLE OVERVIEW
3.1 Front Overview
A Driver Door Handle

A B C D E F F
B Outside Rear View Mirror
C Front Windshield
D Front Windshield Wiper
E Hood Latch
F Hood
G H/L High/ Low Beam
H Front Tow Hook
I Fog / Cornering Lamp*
J Turn Indicator
K Side Repeater
L Footstep*
* If equipped
L K J I H
W52C01

VEHICLE OVERVIEW
3.2 Rear Overview
A B A Rear Flip up Window

B Spare wheel
C Rear Tow hook mounting provision
D Rear Swing Gate
E Rear swing gate handle,
F Rear Park Lamp/Brake Lamp
G Rear Turn signal Lamp
H Fuel /DEF Lid
H G F E D C

VEHICL E OVERVIEW
3.3 Instrument Panel Overview
A B C D E F G H I A Accelerator/Brake/Clutch
A Side Vents M
Pedal
B Passenger Airbag N 12V Power Outlet
C Centre Vents O Transmission Gear Lever
D Infotainment Screen* P Parking Brake

J
W
E Steering controls —Audio* Q Can/Bottle holder
K
1 2
3
0 4
A/C
V
L F Steering wheel R Power Window switches
U
T M G Instrument Cluster S 4WD/2WD shift Lever
N
S O H Control Stalk T Indicators
R P Steering Mounted - Cruise
I U HVAC Controls*
Control*
Q
Headlamp Levelling/Switch
J V Glove Box
Bank
K Horn Pad/Driver Airbag W IP Branding Plate
L Hazard Switch * – If equipped

INSTRUMENT CLUSTER OVERVIEW
4 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER OVERVIEW

4.1 Instrument Cluster
A B C D
C H G F E C
N o t e : Images in the cluster owner's manual is representation for high end. Low end cluster will have similar images in gray scale.

4.2 Warning Lamps Overview – Diesel
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
32
31
11
30
29
12
28 13
27 14
15
26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16

Warning Lamps Overview – Petrol
1 2 3 4 5 6 8 9 10
32
31
11
12
28
27 14
15
26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 16

1 Left Turn Indicator 18 Head Lamp High Beam Lamp

2 OBD Check Lamp 19 Seat Belt Warning Lamp
3 Low Engine Oil Pressure Warning Lamp 20 Low Fuel Warning Lamp
4 Door Ajar Warning Lamp 21 High Engine Coolant Temperature Warning Lamp
5 AT Malfunction indicator Lamp* 22 HHC malfunction *
6 Airbag Warning Lamp 23 4WD Low
7 Water-in-Fuel warning Lamp* 24 HDC malfunction *
8 Battery Charging System Warning Lamp 25 Parking Brake ON/Brake Fluid Low Warning Lamp
9 Right Turn Indicator 26 ESP Warning Lamp*
10 ABS Warning Lamp 27 4WD HIGH
11 Check Engine Lamp 28 ESP OFF*
12 Overspeed Alert 29 Glow Plug Indicator*
13 DPF indicator Lamp* 30 REGEN indicator Lamp*
14 Parking Lamp 31 Cruise Control*
15 Immobiliser 32 Tiretronics*
16 Front Fog Lamp Indicator*
17 DEF indicator Lamp* *if equipped

4.3 Warning Lamps
The phenomenon of warning lamps flashing momentarily when ignition is turned ON is called pre-check. This is self check done by the cluster
at every ignition ON.
Symbol Warning Lamp/Tell Tale Lamp Pre-check Lamp Status Action/Remarks

Indicates left turn lamp is blinking
Slow or Fast S l o w B l i n k i n g : Normal operation
Left Turn Indicators No Blinking F a s t B l i n k i n g : One / more left turn lamp bulb has fused.
Have the bulb replaced
Telltale will always be ON till engine starts after which it will
Continuously ON or turn OFF. Telltale ON even after start of engine indicates an
OBD Check Lamp Yes Blinking emission system related failure. Contact an Authorized
Mahindra Dealer immediately.
Telltale will always be ON till engine starts after which it will
Low Engine Oil Pressure turn OFF. Telltale ON even after start of engine indicates low
No Continuously ON
Warning Lamp engine oil pressure. Contact an Authorized Mahindra Dealer
immediately
Door Ajar Warning Lamp No Continuously ON Indicates one or more doors are open
Telltale ON indicates malfunction in the automatic

AT Malfunction indicator Continuously ON till Continuously ON or
transmission. Contact an Authorized Mahindra Dealer
! Lamp* Engine Starts AT Blinking
immediately

Indicates malfunction of the airbag system. Contact an

Airbag Warning Lamp Yes Continuously ON
Authorized Mahindra Dealer immediately
Water in Fuel warning Lamp* Continuously ON Indicates water in fuel filter. Drain the water from filter or
Yes
contact an Authorized Mahindra Dealer for assistance
Telltale will be ON in ignition ON But engine is OFF. If it is ON in

Battery Charging System engine ON condition, it represents malfunction in charging
No Continuously ON
Warning Lamp system. Contact an Authorized Mahindra Dealer for
assistance
Indicates right turn lamp is blinking
Slow or Fast S l o w B l i n k i n g : Normal operation
Right Turn Indicators No Blinking F a s t B l i n k i n g : One /more right turn lamp bulb has fused.
Have the bulb replaced
Indicates malfunction of the ABS system. Contact an

ABS Warning Lamp Yes Continuously ON
Authorised Mahindra Dealer immediately
Continuously ON or Indicates a potential malfunction in the Engine System,

ENGINE ! Check Engine Lamp Yes Blinking contact an Authorized Mahindra Dealer immediately
Telltale will blink when vehicle is running at speed greater

Overspeed Alert No Blinking
than 120 kmph

Continuously ON or If the DPF indicator is ON in the engine running condition then

DPF Indicator Lamp * Yes DPF regeneration has not happened. Follow the instructions
Blinking
mentioned in the “EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM”
Parking Lamp No Continuously ON Indicates Park Lamp is ON
S l o w B l i n k i n g i n I G N O N : vehicle has been turned on using

an invalid key.
Continuously ON or
Immobilizer No F a s t B l i n k i n g / C o n t i n u o u s l y O N : Indicates a system
Blinking
malfunction
Contact an Authorised Mahindra Dealer immediately
It indicates that either DEF Level is low or incorrect DEF has

DEF Indicator Lamp* Yes Continuously ON been filled or DEF Dosing is malfunctioning. Follow the
instructions mentioned in the “EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM”
Head lamp High Beam Continuously ON Indicates Head lamp high beam is ON
No
Indicator
Front Fog Lamp Indicator * Continuously Lamp Indicates front fog lamps are ON.
No
ON

Driver Seat Belt Warning Lamp No Continuously ON Telltale ON indicates that the driver seat belt is not buckled.
Telltale ON indicates that the fuel in the tank has reached the
Continuously ON or
Low Fuel Warning Lamp No reserve level. Telltale blinking indicates a failure in the fuel
Blinking
gauge. Contact Authorized Mahindra Dealer immediately.
High Coolant Temperature Continuously ON or Telltale ON indicates that the engine coolant temperature is
Warning Lamp No Blinking high. Telltale blinking indicates very high coolant temperature
Indicates malfunction of Hill Hold Control. Contact an

HHC Malfunction* No Continuously ON
Authorised Mahindra Dealer immediately
B l i n k i n g : Indicates 4 wheel drive low engagement is in

4WD Continuously ON or progress.
4WD Low No Blinking
LOW
O N : 4 Wheeldrive low is engaged.
Indicates malfunction of Hill Descend Control. Contact an

HDC* No Continuously ON Authorized Mahindra Dealer immediately


Either one of the below conditions:
Parking Brake ON/Brake Fluid 1. Park Brake might be engaged
Low Warning Lamp/ EBD Yes Continuously ON 2. Brake fluid level might be low
Malfunction 3. There is some concern in ABS/EBD failure. Please contact
Mahindra Dealer.
B l i n k i n g : Indicates ESP has taken control of the vehicle
ESP Malfunction Warning Continuously ON or stability
Lamp* Yes Blinking C o n t i n u o u s l y O N : Indicates a malfunction in the ESP system.
Contact an Authorised Mahindra Dealer immediately
B l i n k i n g : indicates 4 wheel drive high engagement is in

Continuously ON or progress.
4WD High No Blinking
O N : 4 wheel drive high is engaged..
ESP OFF Lamp* Yes Continuously ON Indicates ESP OFF
Indicates a malfunction in the starting system. Contact an

Glow Plug Indicator* No Continuously ON
Authorized Mahindra Dealer immediately
Continuously ON or ON: Regeneration is required

REGEN Indicator Lamp* NO Blink: Regeneration is in progress
Blinking

Cruise Control Indicator * Yes Continuously ON Indicates vehicle is in Cruise mode
Indicates low/high tyre pressure or possible malfunction in

Continuously ON or Tiretronics. Refer to Tiretronics section in INSTRUMENT
Tiretronics* Yes Blinking CLUSTER FEATURES/WHEELS AND TYRES chapter for
further details
* – If equipped

EMISSIO N CONTRO L SYSTEM - Applic able fo r Diesel
5 EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM - Applicable for 5.2 Selective Catalytic Reduction(SCR)

Diesel
Selective Catalytic Reduction (SCR) is an advanced active emission
The emission control system is a highly effective system which control technology system that injects a liquid-reducing agent
controls exhaust emissions from the engine and crucial for meeting through a special catalyst into the exhaust stream of a diesel
emission norms specified by law. engine. The reductant is called as Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF). The
DEF sets off a chemical reaction that converts nitrogen oxides into
Your vehicle is equipped with the following emission control systems nitrogen and water which is then expelled through the vehicle
for meeting BS VI emission norms. tailpipe.
1. Diesel Oxidation Catalyst (DOC)
2. Selective Catalytic Reduction(SCR) 5.2.1 Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) MaxiCLEAN
3. Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF) To enable SCR system work efficiently and to ensure emission
In order to ensure proper function of the emission control systems, compliance, It is recommended to use MaxiCLEAN DEF meeting IS
it is mandatory to get your vehicle inspected and maintained by an 17042 (or) ISO 22241 specification.
authorized Mahindra dealer. The maintenance schedule in this
Refilling DEF is part of regular maintenance service. DEF
manual need to be followed.
consumption is highly dependent on driving conditions/pattern. It
It is also extremely important to use correct grade of fuel, may be necessary to refill DEF reservoir in-between the scheduled
Confirming to IS 1460; 2017 BS VI Specification. service, You need to monitor DEF Indicator Tell Tale and symbols/
text messages displayed on infotainment screen / Cluster.
5.1 Diesel Oxidation Catalyst (DOC) MaxiCLEAN DEF is available at all the authorized Mahindra dealers
in variable packs. Individual DEF Packs may have specific filler neck,
A diesel oxidation catalyst (DOC) is an after treatment component for filling DEF in the vehicle. While refilling DEF, Ensure no spillage on
that is designed to convert carbon monoxide (CO) and the body of self and vehicle to avoid any stains or inconvenience.
hydrocarbons (HC) into carbon dioxide (CO2) and water (H2O).

EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM - Applicable for Diesel
• While refilling DEF inside tank, be careful not to allow any

foreign particles, liquids, wiping paper/clothing fibers or lint
It is unlawful to tamper with or remove any component of the to get inside the system. These may clog or damage the
after treatment system. It is strongly recommended not to use system.
DEF which is not meeting above specification. Further, this may
lead to emission non-compliance and warranty will be void. • If DEF is spilled over vehicle components and metal surfaces,
rinse with water or wipe off with sponge and water. DEF
residues will corrode the components and metal surfaces,
painted body panels.
• Use Genuine DEF MaxiCLEAN always. • DEF is not a fuel additive and must not be added to the diesel
• Incase of non-availability of above Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) fuel tank. If DEF is mixed with the diesel fuel, engine/fuel
complying to IS 17042 (or) ISO 22241 specification can be system could get damaged.
used. • In such a case , do not start the engine and immediately
• Never attempt to use agricultural grade urea mixed with contact nearest Mahindra Authorised Dealer for assistance.
water. Agricultural grade urea does not meet the necessary
specifications and the after treatment system of your vehicle 5.2.2 Contamination/ Incorrect DEF
may be damaged.
• Total DEF quantity inside the DEF Tank should never be more In the event that incorrect or contaminated fluid is filled inside DEF
than 20 liters. Overfilling may result in system/component Tank, contact an authorized M&M dealer to determine the
failure. appropriate repair direction.
• DEF quality and purity can be ensured only if it is stored
properly. Hence ensure the storage of DEF in cool, dry place
between storage.
• Do not add urea to DEF and do not dilute with water. This
may cause after treatment system damage.

5.2.3 Handling of DEF permanent corrosive stains on the metal surfaces which
cannot be removed.
5.2.4 DEF Operating Condition

• Ensure that DEF does not come into contact with skin, eyes,
or clothing DEF will freeze at -11°C (12.2°F). This is natural phenomenon. The
• Keep DEF out of the reach of children DEF system in the vehicle is designed considering this and does not
require any external heating or additives to avoid freezing.
• In case if any part of the body is in contact with DEF, clean
affected area immediately with plenty of water
• If DEF contacted with eyes, flush with plenty of water The Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) system purges to prevent
immediately and seek medical help. damage from freezing. Do NOT disconnect battery power within
• If DEF is swallowed, rinse mouth immediately with plenty of 20 minutes of switching the ignition key off. Failure to comply
water, drink plenty of water immediately and seek medical may result in vehicle or property damage.
help.
• Don’t store DEF refill containers inside the vehicle. Ammonia 5.2.5 Refilling DEF
vapors may escape from container which have a pungent
odor and are particularly irritating for skin, mucous Your Vehicle DEF Filler Neck is located near the Fuel filler Neck. The
membranes and eyes. Inhaling ammonia vapors may cause DEF storage tank is located under the body.
burning eyes, nose and throat, as well as cough and
watering eyes. Following below steps to refill the DEF:
1. Park the vehicle on level ground and switch OFF the ignition.
• When opening the DEF filler cap, ammonia vapors may
escape. Refill DEF in a well ventilated area only.
• If Diesel Exhaust Fluid is spilled on metal surfaces rinse and
clean immediately with water. Failure to do so may leave

2. The fuel lid is manually locked/unlocked from outside by using 9. Verify that there is no warning regarding DEF low level. If DEF
conventional key. Level Low warning is still appearing, Check enough quantity
filled, If still problem persist Contact nearest Authorized
Mahindra Dealer immediately.
10. DEF is being monitored through iSmart tool during regular
CA E L V E
FU MO
RE
US SP SL O
service at dealership and quantity will be filled accordingly.
E RA
IN Y WLY
J U MA
RY Y
DI
ES
EL
It is highly recommended to DEF filling always at Ignition off
condition only
3. Rotate the DEF filler cap in anti-clockwise direction and

remove.
4. Fill DEF from the Container Pack. Each container pack has
unique mouth and filling provision. Ensure utilizing the same
and avoid spillage. Example. 10 Lit. Pack provided with filler
tube.
5. Fill DEF as required. Maximum Storage capacity 20 litre.
Minimum filling 5.0 liter.
6. Rinse with water or use sponge wetted with water to clean the
components/surfaces in case of DEF spills over.
7. Put the DEF filler cap back in its place and tighten in the clock
wise direction, then close the fuel lid shut.
8. Switch the ignition ON

5.3 Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF) Take vehicle to highway and drive for 20–30 mins @ speeds above 60
kms/hr until the lamp to turns off
The Diesel particulate filter (DPF) is an integral part of the vehicle (or)
exhaust gas emission reduction systems and it removes the soot Perform DPF Park Regeneration
from (Particulate matter) the exhaust gas. Unlike a disposable air
filter, the DPF is regenerative filter. Regeneration is triggered
automatically according to the driving conditions which burns of the
accumulated particles/soot. In other words, the active burning by DPF park regeneration is only possible when the REGEN telltale
engine control system and high exhaust gas temperature caused is ON in the instrument cluster
by normal/high driving condition burns and removes the • Park the vehicle safely in a well ventilated levelled open space
accumulated soot. The process is called as D P F A c t i v e and free of any flammable material.
Regeneration.
• Shift the gear lever to Neutral with the engine running and apply
However, if the vehicle continues to be driven at either of the the parking brake.
following conditions the accumulated soot may not be automatically
removed because of low exhaust gas temperature. • REGEN screen will appear in the drive info menu of instrument
cluster when the REGEN telltale is ON
1. Heavy traffic driving conditions, especially in city
2. Frequent short trips
3. Low speed for a long time
When more than a certain amount of soot deposited,
the DPF lamp illuminates.
If the DPF lamp turns ON or Blinking while driving the
vehicle, then it indicates DPF regeneration has not occurred
successfully. At this moment, we suggest DPF regeneration must
be done through a specific methodology. The same is as mentioned
below:

• REGEN screen will go OFF if REGEN telltale turns OFF. minutes @ speeds above 60kms/hr until DPF warning lamp
turns OFF
• When in the REGEN screen of the drive info menu, long Press
OK button to start park regeneration. (or)
• Once regeneration starts, “In Progress” text will appear below Take vehicle to Mahindra authorised dealer for assistance
REGEN. The engine idle speed will increase indicating
regeneration has started..
• Park Regeneration can take up to 30 minutes to complete. Once Diesel Fuel
completed the REGEN warning lamp in the instrument cluster It is recommended to use the regulated automotive diesel fuel
will turn OFF. The engine’s idling speed also returns to normal confirming to IS 1460: 2017 spec only.
If the diesel fuel with high sulfur content (more than 10 PPM)
and unspecified additives are used, it can cause the DPF
Park Regeneration process may not start if CHECK ENGINE system damage and emission warranty issues.
LAMP or OBD are ON in the cluster. Take vehicle to Mahindra
authorised dealer for assistance.
• During the regeneration process, take care the vehicle is not
near any flammable materials as you may observe hot
When Park regeneration is happening do not press the emission gases from exhaust pipe.
Accelerator, Brake or Clutch pedals as this will cancel the
regeneration process. • In order to avoid burns & personal injury, stay yourself away
from exhaust system.
• Follow speed limits & traffic regulations as defined by local
When Park regeneration is happening, switching off the ignition jurisdiction while doing forced regeneration.
will cancel the regeneration process. The park regeneration
process may not start if requested when the engine is switched
ON again. Take the vehicle to highway and drive for 20– 30

5.4 Alerts in Cluster
5.4.1 DPF Alert It is unlawful to tamper with or remove any component of the
after treatment system. It is strongly recommended not to use
DPF Alert message will appear when the DPF is clogged. Contact DEF which is not meeting above specification. Further, this may
Authorised Mahindra Dealer immediately for assistance. lead to emission non-compliance and warranty will be void.
DPF is clogged
5.4.3 DEF Level Indication
When DEF level in tank fall below pre-defined values, warnings are
flashed in four stages. These four warning stages are explained
below:
E31 E32 E33
5.4.2 DEF Alert

Introduction
E34 E35
DEF Tell Tale will get illuminated and relevant
messages will be flashed on Cluster screen due to
any of the following reasons:
• DEF level low
• Incorrect DEF detected
• DEF dosing malfunction

Irrespective of the warning stages, once DEF level is low, 5.0 liter of 5.4.4 DEF Quality
DEF needs to be filled. If the warnings continue even after refill,
contact nearest authorized Mahindra dealer immediately. If SCR system detects quality of DEF inside the tank is not meeting
IS 17042 (or) ISO 22241 specification, warnings will flashed in four
In absence of DEF level low warning, refilling is not recommended. stages. These four warning stages are explained below:
Total DEF quantity inside the DEF Tank should never be more than
20 liter. Overfilling may result in system/component failure. Only E11 E12 E13
authorized Mahindra dealer will be able to correctly determine
quantity of DEF present inside tank. Hence if you are refilling the
DEF yourself, fill only 5.0 liter, in case DEF Low level warning is
flashed.
E14 E15
If the DEF warning lamp turns on due to the DEF level, refill the
DEF tank. Failure to refill may cause the engine start restriction.
If the DEF warning lamp turns on due to the DEF quality, see
contamination/incorrect fluid for corrective action. Failure to correct may
cause the engine start restriction.

5.4.5 DEF Dosing Malfunction 5.5 Regen Alerts
If SCR system detects any malfunction due to failures in Regen Aborted Regen Completed Regen Not Started
components or tampering, warnings are flashed in four stages.
These four stages are explained below:
E21 E22 E23
Regen Requested Regen Required Regen Started
E24 E25
Procedure for initiating REGEN:

1. If REGEN telltale is ON, navigate to Above page will be
available only if regeneration can be done in vehicle and
REGEN TT is ON.
If the DEF warning lamp turns on due to dosing malfunction, see your
authorised Mahindra dealer to have this repaired. Failure to repair the
2. Hold OK to start regeneration.
system may cause the engine start restriction.
3. Once REGEN has started, Text in page will change to REGEN
In Progress.

5.6 Instrument Cluster Tell-Tale
REGEN
Indicator Lamp OBD Check Lamp
Error Code Alert Message in Cluster Action to Taken
E31 DEF LEVEL LOW ENGINE WILL NOT START IN 2400 KM Fill DEF within 2400 km
E32/E33 DEF LEVEL LOW, ENGINE WILL NOT START IN 800 KM /...KM Fill DEF within 800 km
DPF Indicator Lamp E34 NO RESTART ALLOWED, FILL DEF Fill DEF immediately
E35
NO START ALLOWED, FILL DEF Fill DEF immediately
DEF Indicator Lamp E11 INCORRECT DEF, DETECTED / WRONG DEF, DETECTED Refill with Correct DEF
E12/E13 INCORRECT DEF, ENGINE WILL NOT START IN 800 KM /...KM / Refill with Correct DEF
Warning Lamp Engine Action WRONG DEF ENGINE WILL NOT START IN 800 KM /...KM
Indicates
Status Peformance to be taken
E14 NO RESTART ALLOWED, CHECK DEF Refill with Correct DEF
1. Go to the highway and drive
DPF is above 60 kms/hr for 20-30 min
ON Normal starting (or) E15 NO START ALLOWED, CHECK DEF Refill with Correct DEF
to choke 2. Take the vehicle to Mahindra
Authorized Dealer
E21 DEF DOSING MALFUNCTIONING Contact Mahindra Dealer
Limp DPF almost Take the vehicle to Mahindra
Blinking DEF DOSING MALFUNCTIONING,ENGINE WILL NOT START IN 800 KM /
home fully choked Authorized Dealer E22/E23 Contact Mahindra Dealer
DEF DOSING MALFUNCTIONING,ENGINE WILL NOT START IN ... KM
Limp E24 NO RESTART ALLOWED , DOSING MALFUNCTIONING Contact Mahindra Dealer

DPF Take the vehicle to Mahindra
ON
home fully choked
Authorized Dealer
E25 NO START ALLOWED , DOSING MALFUNCTIONING Contact Mahindra Dealer

Do's & Don’ts • If DEF is spilled over vehicle components and metal surfaces,
rinse with water or wipe off with sponge and water. DEF residues
Selective Catalytic Reduction(SCR) will corrode the components and metal surfaces, painted body
• Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) complying to IS 17042 (or) ISO panels
22241 specification can be used. • Do not refill the DEF with Engine ON or ignition ON state
• Never attempt to use agricultural grade urea mixed with water. • Ensure proper filling access for DEF filling during vehicle body
Agricultural grade urea does not meet the necessary building
specifications and the after treatment system of your vehicle
may be damaged. • When opening the DEF filler cap, ammonia vapors may escape.
Refill DEF in a well ventilated area only.
• Do not add urea to DEF and do not dilute with water. This may
cause after treatment system damage. • Ensure that DEF does not come into contact with skin, eyes, or
clothing
• Total DEF quantity inside the DEF Tank should never be more
than 20 liters. Overfilling may result in system/component Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF)
failure.
During the regeneration process, take care the vehicle is not near
• While refilling DEF inside tank, be careful not to allow any foreign any flammable materials as you may observe hot emission gases
particles, liquids, wiping paper/clothing fibers or lint to get inside from exhaust pipe.
the system. These may clog or damage the system.
In order to avoid burns & personal injury, keep yourself away from
• DEF is not a fuel additive and must not be added to the diesel fuel exhaust system.
tank. If DEF is mixed with the diesel fuel, engine/fuel system
could get damaged Follow speed limits & traffic regulations as Defined by local
jurisdiction while doing forced regeneration

5.7 Instrument Cluster Tell-Tale -Assames
REGEN
REGEN

িছৈ�ম

5.8 Instrument Cluster Tell-Tale -Bengali
REGEN

অকরণীয় অথবা অব�ায়
আইএস অথবা আইএসও অেমািনয়া্র
আশা
আপনার আফ্টার
আফ্টার
অধিক অিতির� আপিন
আঘাত
টয়াংেকর
আইন
অংশ অথবা
অ অথবা
�াভািবক
অংেশ
অথবা অবিশ�াংশ

5.9 Instrument Cluster Tell-Tale-Gujarathi
REGEN
E31
E32/E33
E34
E35
E11
E12/E13
E14
E15
E21
E22/E23
E24
E25


5.10 Instrument Cluster Tell-Tale-Hindi
REGEN
E31
E32/E33
E34
E35
E11
E12/E13
E14
E15
E21
E22/E23
E24
E25


5.11 Instrument Cluster Tell-Tale-Kannada
REGEN


5.12 Instrument Cluster Tell-Tale-Malayalam
REGEN


5.13 Instrument Cluster Tell-Tale-Marathi
REGEN
डी पी फ शी सबं िं धत अलट
लॅ प ची इिं जन
लॅ प दशिवते क काय करावे
ि थित कामिगरी
हायवे वर ६० िकमी / तास या वेगाने
२०-३० िमनटा करीता गाड़ी
चालवा (िकंवा)
नॉमल
अिधकृ त मिहं ा डीलरकड़े
गाड़ी घेऊन जा
मयािदत मता डी पी फ यिु नट पण

ू अिधकृ त मिहं ा डीलरकड़े
भरत आले आहे गाड़ी घेऊन जा
मयािदत मता डी पी फ युिनट पुणतः अिधकृ त मिहं ा डीलरकड़े

भरले आहे गाड़ी घेऊन जा

काय करावे आिण काय क नये

िसलेि टव कॅ टॅिलिटक रड शन (एस सी आर) डी ई फ िफलर कॅ प उघडताना अमोिनयाची वाफ बाहेर येऊ शकते.
के वळ चागं या हवेशीर जागेवर डी ई फ भरा
IS ISO 22241-1 टडड अनसु ार, िडझेल ए झॉ ट लइु ड (डी ई फ) वापरले पािहजे, याला (डी ई फ)
कोणताही पयाय उपल ध नाही. यो य डी ई फ न वापर यास इिं जनला नकु सान होऊ शकते आिण / िकंवा वॉरंटी
र होऊ शकते. िडिजटल पािटकुलेट िफ टर (डीपीएफ)
शेती वापरातील यू रया पा यात िमसळून िडझल ए झॉ ट लईु ड (डी ई फ) बनव याचा कधीही य न क नका.
रीजनरे शन ि येदर यान ए झॉ ट िस टममधनू गरम गॅस जा त येतो. वाहन कोण याही वलनशील पदाथ, कागद /
वापर यास एस सी आर यिु नट खराब होऊ शकते.
पालापाचोळा जवळ नस याची खबरदारी या, यामळ ु े आग लागू शकते.
डी ई फ म ये एिडिट ज िमसळु नका आिण पा याने पातळ क नका. अ यथा एस सी आर यिु नट खराब होऊ शकते. भाजणे आिण वैयि क इजा टाळ यासाठी ए झॉ ट िस टमपासनू दरू रहा.
डी ई फ टँकम ये १६ िलटरपे ा जा त डी ई फ भ नये . माणापे ा जा त भर यास यिु नट/ पाट खराब होऊ शकतात. थािनक ेि य िनयमा नसु ार रीजनरे शन या दर यान वेग मयादा आिण रहदारी िनयमांचे पालन करा
डी ई फ भरत असताना, टाक म ये कोणतेही बा कण, िलि वड, कागद / कपड् याचे तंतू जाऊ देऊ नका. यामळ
ु े यिु नट
म ये बाधा िकंवा नक
ु सान होऊ शकते.
डी ई फ हे िडझेल इधं नाचे एिडिट ह नाही आिण डीझल टाक म ये भ नये. डी ई फ िडझेल इधं नात िमसळ यास इिं जन /
यएु ल िस टम चे नक ु सान होऊ शकते.
जर डी ई फ गाड़ी या इतर जागेवर / धातू या पृ भागावर पडले असेल तर ते पा याने धवु ा िकंवा पा याने िभजलेला कापड
वापरा. लगेच साफ न के यास गजं लागू शकतो.
इिं जन सु िकंवा इ नीशन ऑन ि थतीत डी ई फ भ नये
गाड़ीची बॉडी िबि डंग करत असताना डी ई फ भर यासाठी या जागेवर यो य त हेने पोहोचू शकु, हे िनि त करा

5.14 Instrument Cluster Tell-Tale-Oriya
REGEN
E31
E32/E33
E34
E35
E11
E12/E13
E14
E15
E21
E22/E23
E24
E25


5.15 Instrument Cluster Tell-Tale-Tamil
REGEN
E31
E32/E33 800 800
E34
E35
E11
E12/E13 800
E14
E15
E21
E22/E23 800
E24
E25


5.16 Instrument Cluster Tell-Tale-Telugu
REGEN
E31
E32/E33
E34
E35
E11
E12/E13
E14
E15
E21
E22/E23
E24
E25


SEATS AND SEAT BELTS
6 SEATS AND SEAT BELTS • The top curve of the steering wheel should align with your chin
for ideal road visibility
6.1 Driver seat • Adjust your seat and seat back angle such that your wrists rest
on top of the steering wheel freely
6.1.1 Sitting in the Correct Position
• Ensure your legs are in a bent position while fully depressing the
clutch pedal
The seat should be adjusted while still maintaining control of the
foot pedals, steering wheel and your view of the instrument panel
controls.
Never adjust the driver's seat while the vehicle is in motion. The
seat may unexpectedly move and cause the driver to
W12E01
unintentionally operate the accelerator or brake, or turn the
steering wheel, causing loss of control of the vehicle, an
Follow the tips below for a comfortable and safe journey; accident or serious personal injury. Adjust the driver's seat only
when the vehicle is not in motion.
• Sit in an upright position with the base of your spine pressed
against the seat back Never put objects under the seats. They may interfere with the
seat-lock mechanism or unexpectedly activate the seat position
• Adjust the head restraint as close as possible to the above adjusting lever, causing the seat to suddenly move, resulting in
specified position, with the top of the head restraint even with loss of control of the vehicle, an accident or serious personal
the top of your head injury.
• Maintain sufficient distance between yourself and the steering While adjusting the seat, do not put your hands under the seat
wheel. Maintain at least a ten inch (10") distance from the or near the moving parts. This may lead to injuries.
centre of the steering wheel to your chest

SEA TS A ND SEA T BELTS
6.1.2 Front Seat Slide 6.1.3 Front Seat Recline
Move the seat forward or backward by lifting the adjustment lever To adjust the seat back, lift the recline lever located on the
located under the seat front and release once the desired position outboard side of the seat, lean back and release the lever at the
is reached. desired position. To return the seat back, lift the lever, lean forward,
and release the lever.
While adjusting the seat, make sure the latch engages fully and
the seat is locked firmly in the desired position. An unlocked The seat belts provide maximum protection in a frontal or rear
seat may move in a sudden stop or collision, causing injury to collision when the occupants are sitting up straight and well
the person in that seat. Push and pull on the seat to be sure it back in the seats. If you are reclined, the lap belt may slide past
is locked. your hips and apply restraint forces directly to the abdomen, or
the shoulder strap may contact your neck.

6.1.5 Lumbar Support (if equipped)

When returning a extremely reclined seat back to its upright
position, make sure you support the seat back while operating
the lever.
6.1.4 Driver Seat Height Adjust (if equipped)
Both the front seat backs have lumbar adjustment feature. The
lumbar contour of the lumbar support can be adjusted by means of
the adjusting wheel on the inner side of the seat back.
Properly adjusted lumbar support provides adequate back support
essential during long journeys.
Lift/Push the seat height adjustment lever located on the outboard
side of the driver seat to raise/lower the seat. Adjust the seat
height such that you are able to depress the clutch pedal Do not use force, rotate the lumbar adjustment lever beyond
completely. the extreme stop positions in either direction.
It is recommended to adjust the seat height only when the

vehicle is stationary.

6.2 Head Restraint
Your vehicle seats are equipped with head restraints which are Never drive with the head restraints not properly adjusted,
vertically adjustable. The purpose of these head restraints is to help head restraints removed or inserted in a flipped condition. With
limit head motion in the event of a collision. no support behind your head, your neck could be seriously
injured in a collision.
6.3 Co-Driver Lift & Slide seat (If equipped)
Always align top of the head restraint with the top of your head or
as close to it as possible. To raise/lower the head restraint, press
the lock tab and pull/push the restraint up/down.
The head restraint can be pulled out completely by depressing the
locking button while pulling the restraint out. To put it back, align the Step 1 : Pull the shoulder knob to unlatch the seat
head restraint shafts over the holes on the seat top and push the
restraint straight down till you hear the lock click. Step 2 : Push the seat to slide forward
Keep the seat back as upright as possible so the headrest is

behind, not beneath, and almost touching your head.

6.3.1 Rear Seat Foldable (If equipped) 6.3.2 Rear Seat Recline - 2nd Row (If equipped)
Pull the strap and fold the rear seat backrest.
To adjust the seat back, lift the recline strap located on the
outboard side of the seat, lean back and release the strap at the
desired position. To return the seat back, lift the strap lean forward,
and release the strap.

6.4 Seat Belts • Seat belts should be adjusted as tightly as possible, consistent
with comfort to properly secure the wearer in the seat.
6.4.1 General Warnings and Instructions
At least once each month, inspect the seat belt webbing for any
cuts, tears, or other signs of wear (such as fraying along the
edges). Also inspect the anchors, retractors, and buckles to be
sure they are tight and operational.
• All occupants, including the driver, should always wear their seat
belt no matter how short the trip in order to minimize the risk of
severe injury in the event of a crash. In an accident, an un-belted
passenger becomes a projectile, and can cause serious injury to
himself or another passenger.
• The seat belts provided for your vehicle are designed for people
• In a rollover crash, an un-belted person is significantly more likely of adult size, must be properly used and maintained.
prone to Injury than a person wearing a seat belt
• For usage of adult seat belt to secure children refer to section
• In order to be properly buckled, you must always sit up straight on manual for child seat positions and use a child restraint
and keep your feet on the floor in front of you. The lap part must systems
be worn low and tight across your hips, just touching the top of
your thighs. While fastening the seat belt, the shoulder strap of
the seat belt must pass over your chest and top of your
shoulder. It must never touch your neck, face, the side of your
shoulder, arm, or pass under your arm. The belt must always be
flat against your body and not twisted in any way. Nothing, such
as an arm rest, a pocketbook, or any external objects should be
between you and the seat belt. Improper wearing of a seat belt
will reduce the protection in an accident.

phones, can become a projectile in the event of an accident or

sudden stop, causing injuries to occupants in the vehicle
Never use a damaged seat belt system. A damaged seat belt

will not provide protection in an accident, resulting in serious
injury.
• Seat belt systems can be prone to abuse. They are not
indestructible. They must be handled with care to avoid damage
• Passengers should not move out of or change seats while the • Keep the belts clean and dry. Belt retraction may become
vehicle is in moving condition. Passenger who does not wear the difficult if the belts and webbing are soiled. If they need cleaning,
seat belts will be under a high risk of thrown against the vehicle use a mild soap solution or lukewarm water. Never use bleach,
inside hard parts, against other occupants or out of the vehicle dye, or abrasive cleaners. These chemicals will severely weaken
during emergency stop or collision. the belts
• Do not use any accessories on seat belts or modify in any way • Retractors in 3-point type seat belts retract the seat belts when
the seat belt system. Devices claiming to improve occupant not in use. The inertia lock and coil spring allow the belts to
comfort or reposition the seat belt can reduce the protection remain comfortable on users during normal driving. During
provided by the seat belt and increase the chance of serious accidents or abrupt stops, inertia locks restrict the sudden
injury in a crash forward movement of the wearer
• An accident or emergency stop, can damage your seat belt Seat Belts - Patients
system, even if the accident is “minor”. Please have your
Authorized Mahindra Dealer inspect the seat belt system after Persons with serious medical conditions should also wear a seat
an accident belt. Consult your doctor for specific recommendations before
travel.
• Please be aware that any unsecured item in your vehicle, such
as your pet, unsecured child restraint system, a laptop or mobile

Seat Belts - Pregnant Women Each seat belt is meant for use by one person only. Using one
seat belt for more than one person at a time is dangerous. The
seat belt will not be able to spread the impact forces properly
leading to serious injuries.
Never put a belt around a child being carried on the occupant's
lap. This could lead to serious injuries.
Seat Belt Usage is Necessary to:
• Reduce the possibility of being thrown from your vehicle
• Reduce the possibility of injuries to upper body, lower body and
legs during an accident
Pregnant women must also wear seat belts. Consult your doctor • Hold the driver in a position which allows better control of the
for specific recommendations. vehicle
The lap belt should be worn snugly and as low as possible over the Children who are too large for child restraint systems should always
hips. The shoulder belt should be worn across your shoulder, but occupy the rear seat and use the vehicle seat belts. The lap portion
never across the stomach area. When worn properly, the seat belt should be fastened snug on the hips and as low as possible and the
will protect both the mother and the foetus in an accident or shoulder strap should be across the child's shoulder, not the neck
emergency stop. or face. If you are unable to position the strap across the child's
shoulder, the child should remain in a booster seat. Frequently
check the seat belt to be sure it remains snug and in position. A
squirming child could cause the seat belt to come out of position.
A pregnant woman should never wear the seat belt across the
stomach area. This could lead to serious injuries to the foetus
and/or the pregnant mother.
Never wear twisted seat belts. Excessive forces will be
transferred from the belt to the wearer, in a collision, resulting
in serious personal injury.

6.5 Fastening the Seat Belt “click” when the tab locks into the buckle. Pull up on the shoulder
strap to tighten the lap belt across your hips. The seat belt
6.5.1 Three Point type (if equipped) retractor will pull in any slack in the shoulder strap. A slow and easy
motion will allow the belt to extend and let you move your body
around freely.
CORRECT SEAT BELT

W12E23 POSITIONING
Periodically check the seat belt as you ride to be sure it remains

snug and in position. If there is a sudden stop or impact, the belt will
lock into position. It will also lock (restrict) if you try to lean forward
too quickly.
If the driver’s seat belt is not fastened when the ignition is

W12E24
switched ON, the seat belt warning lamp illuminates. Refer to
Adjust the seat as needed and sit up straight and well back in the ‘Warning Lamps’ in the ‘Features and Control’ chapter for
seat. To fasten your seat belt, pull the webbing out of the retractor further details.
and insert the metal tongue into the buckle. There will be an audible

6.5.2 Unfastening the Seat Belt (both 3-Point )
PR
ES
S
CORRECT SEAT BELT
POSITIONING
CORRECT SEAT BELT

POSITIONING
6.5.3 Driver Seat Belt Reminder Indication

To release the belt, press the buckle release button and allow the
belt to retract. If the belt does not retract smoothly, pull it out and The driver seat belt reminder warning symbol lamp will blink in
check for kinks or twists. Then make sure it remains untwisted as it instrument cluster if driver doesn’t wear the seat belt and will be
retracts. continuous until belt is buckled. Chime will be activated when vehicle
travels more than 500 mts or attains 25 kmph of speed while
vehicle is in moving condition which will be ON for 95 Sec
Never insert coins, clips, etc. in the buckle as this may prevent
you from properly latching the tongue and may cause damage
to the buckle mechanism, thereby making the seat belt
ineffective in an accident, resulting in serious personal injury.

6.5.4 Passenger Occupant Detection System (PODS) & restraint seat and using the adult seat belt which is provided to
Seat Belt Reminder Indication use for persons taller than 140cm. Always ensure Passenger
Airbag is turn OFF before you carry child on passenger seat.
6.6 Child Restraint System (CRS) Fitment using the seat

belt system
6.6.1 Child Restraint

PODS Sensor
When carrying infants or small children, an appropriate child
restraint system should always be used. The child restraint system
S22E29 should be appropriate for your child’s weight and height and
properly fit on the car’s seat. Accident statistics indicate that
PODS system is to detect the presence of occupant in the seat. children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seat (if
equipped) rather than in the front seat. If passenger seat to be use
If Occupant is present on passenger seat and not for child carrying then it is mandatory to OFF the Passenger Airbag
wearing the seat belt, Seat belt reminder warning by following the instructions and using options provided (refer the
symbol lamp will glow on the center fascia switch user manual)
provided in vehicle IP and will be continuous until the seat belt is
buckled. Along with this warning symbol, a Chime in Cluster will be
ON for 95 secs. After market seat covers also may deteriorate the
detection senor performance, don’t use the non recommended/ If child presents on passenger seat also seat belt reminder
non authorized seat covers. warning symbol lamp will glow and it is strongly not
recommended to carry children in front seat without child
restraint seat and using the adult seat belt which is provided to
use for persons taller than 140cm. Always ensure Passenger
If child presents on passenger seat also seat belt reminder
Airbag is turn OFF before you carry child on passenger seat.
warning symbol lamp will glow and it is strongly not
recommended to carry children in front seat without child

6.6.2 Securing Methods of Child Restraint System • Do not allow a child in the cargo areas while the vehicle is
moving condition.
Child restraint systems are designed to be secured in vehicle seats
by seat belts or the latch system (ISOFIX & Top tether seat - if
• If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck, move the child
equipped). closer to the center of the vehicle. Never allow a child to put
the shoulder belt under an arm or behind their back
• Please note that the three-point seat belt is designed for a
person who is taller than 140 cm
• Infants and tiny children should always be restrained in an
infant or child restraint system (CRS)I.
• Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the front seat
with front passenger airbag ON condition. A child in a rear-
facing child restraint installed in the front seat can be
seriously injured if the front passenger airbag deploys.
Secure a rear-facing child restraint in the rear seat (if
equipped).
• •A front-facing child restraint should be secured in the rear
seat whenever possible. If installed in the front passenger
seat, adjust the seat as far back as it will go. When installing
a child restraint system, follow the instructions provided by
the manufacturer..
• When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in the
vehicle with the seat belt or remove it from the vehicle.
• In a collision an unrestrained child, even a tiny baby, can
become a missile inside the vehicle. The force required to
hold even an infant on your lap can become so great that
you could not hold the child, no matter how strong you are..

6.6.3 Infant and Child Safety • When installing a child restraint system, do not let the seat
belts come across the child’s neck, follow the installation
Child Seat instructions
Children that are too small to use the seat belts must be properly
secured in a child restraint system (CRS).
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in the front

passenger seat with front passenger airbag, because of the
danger that an inflating passenger airbag could impact the
rear-facing child restraint and kill the child. Passenger
Airbag turn OFF is mandatory to use passenger seat to
carry child.
• Use only the recommended and suitable child restraint
systems. Follow the manufacturer’s instructions for
installation and use of the child restraint system in vehicle.
• Do not carry your child on your lap while driving. You cannot
resist against the impact pressure in an accident. The child
could be crushed between you and the parts of vehicle
• Remember that a child restraint seat left in a concealed
vehicle can cause it to be very hot. Check the seating surface
before putting your child in the child restraint
• When your child restraint is not in use, remove it from the
vehicle or keep it secured with a seat belt to prevent it from
being thrown forward in case of a sudden stop or an
accident

Table of Information on Child Restraint Systems Installation Suitability for Various Seating Positions
TYPE B
TYPEA
Y4C048 Y4C049 Y4C050 Y4C051
Mass Group Restraint device figure Front Passenger Rear out board Mounting method of
vehicle
O ~ up to 10 kg (0 ~ 9 months) Rear-facing child seat U U 3-point seat belt
O+ ~ up to 13 kg (0 ~ 2 years) Rear-facing child seat U U 3-point seat belt
I ~ 9 to 18 kg (9 months ~ 4 years) Forward-facing child seat U U 3-point seat belt
II ~ 15 to 25 kg (4 years ~ 6 years) Booster seat U U 3-point seat belt
III ~ 22 to 36 kg (6 years ~ 12 years) Booster seat U U 3-point seat belt
U: Suitable for “universal” category restraints approved for use in the mass
group
UF: Suitable for forward-facing “universal” category restraints approved for It is strongly recommended to carry the children with Child
use in the mass group. Restraint System (CRS) at rear seats for good safety. Child
L: Suitable for particular child restraints given on attached list. These sitting on the Passenger seat with Passenger airbag ON
restraints may be of the “semi-universal” categories condition may cause serious injury or even death during collision
X: Seat position not suitable for children in the mass group. due to airbag deployment forces. It is Must to Turn OFF the
Passenger airbag before allowing to child to sit on the
Passenger seat.

• User must read and follow the instructionsprovided in

manual for the Child Restraint System installations in vehicle
using the Adult Seat belt system (or) using the ISOFIX & Top-
tether feature
• Failure to follow all the warnings and instructions could be a
Serious risk to Child safety or even may lead to death, if an
accident occurs.
• Do not leave /allow children to stand in front of vehicle

holding grab handle when the passenger airbag in ON
condition.
• If a child is seated in front seat it may cause serious injury or
even death during accident when PAB deploys due to force

• Never install a rearward facing child restraint system on 6.7 Child Restraint System (CRS) Installation Using
front passenger seat when passenger airbag is ON condition ISOFIX & Top Tether
while on ride.
H ow to use the ISOFIX Lower Lat ch Anchor/ISOFIX R ods
• Properly read and follow the instructions provided by the
manufacture for installation of child restraint system.
• Never hold a child in your lap or arms when the vehicle is
moving condition, sudden braking or while collision child may
thrown on away/trapped in vehicle, which could cause
serious risk
• Don’t modify the passenger seat or forcefully fit the child
restraint system which is having ISOFIX fixing provision can
damage the seat.
W52E18
1. ISOFIX Marking
2. 1.Latch anchor/ISOFIX rod
• The ISOFIX lower latch anchors (rods) are located in rear seats
bottom position. Their locations (1) are shown in the illustration
• Insert the child restraint attachments into the ISOFIX lower latch
anchors (rods) until it clicks. Refer Child seat installation manual.
• Do not use the seat belt for installing the ISOFIX child restraint
ISOFIX system is a standardized method of fitting child seats that
eliminates the need to use the standard adult seatbelt to secure
the seat in the vehicle. This enables a much more secure and

positive location with the added benefit of easier and quicker How to use the Top Tether/Rear Anchor
installation.
There are two top tether rods/rear anchors on the seat base back
side of the rear row front facing seats.
• When using the “ISOFIX” lower latch system (rod), all unused
vehicle rear seat belt metal latch plates or tabs must be
latched securely in their seat belt buckles and the seat belt
webbing must be retracted behind the child restraint to
prevent the child from reaching and taking hold of un-
retracted seat belts. Unlatched metal latch plates or tabs
may allow the child to reach the un-retracted seat belts
which may result in strangulation and a serious injury or
death to the child in the child restraint.
• Child restraint anchorages are designed to withstand only
those loads imposed by correctly-fitted child restraints. 1. Remove the headrest from the rear row seat
Under no circumstances are they to be used for adult seat
belts, harnesses or for attaching other items or equipment 2. Place the child restraint on the rear row seat
to the vehicle
3. Connect the tether connector in child restraint to the top
tether rod/ rear anchor. Securely tighten the child restraint
by adjusting the webbing of the child restraint system (CRS)
tether connector. Follow the clear instructions provide in the
CRS manual
• The top-tether/ rear anchor is the supplemental device to

secure the child restraint system after engaging it by the

ISOFIX rod/lower latches. Therefore, do not secure the child • Rock the child restraint to check if it is securely installed.
restraint system only with the seat back anchors. The Refer to instructions provided by the manufacturer of the
increased load may cause the hooks or anchors to break, child restraint.
causing serious injury or death.
• Do not install the child restraint of such size if it hinders the
• If a child restraint is not properly secured to the vehicle and operations of front seat which may cause problem to front
a child is not properly restrained in the child restraint, the occupants.
child could be seriously injured or killed in a collision. Always
follow the instructions provided by the manufacturer for
installation
• Make sure the latches of the child restraint system are
Firmly latched to the ISOFIX rod/lower latches. In this case,
you can hear the “click” sound/ latch indications provided on
seat.
• Incorrectly installed child restraint system may cause an
unexpected personal injury.
• Child restraint anchorages are designed to withstand only
those loads imposed by correctly fitted child restraints
• The tether strap may not work properly if attached
somewhere other than the correct top tether rod/rear
anchor provided on seat back.
• Don’t put the top tether strap over the head restraint of
rear row seat which is not the correct methods and may
cause risk.

Table of Information on ISOFIX Child Restraint Systems Installation Suitability for Various ISOFIX Positions
TYPE B
TYPEA
Y4C048 Y4C049 Y4C050 Y4C051
Table of Vehicle Handbook Information on ISOFIX Child Restraint Systems Installation Suitability for Various ISOFIX Positions
Mass group Size Class Fixture Vehicle ISOFIX Positions
Front Passenger Rear out board
F ISO/L1 N/A X
Carrycot (Newborn Baby)
G ISO/L2 N/A X
Group 0: up to 10kg (~9 months) E ISO/R1 N/A IL/IU
E ISO/R1 N/A IL/IU
Group 0+: up to 13kg (~0 – 2 years) D ISO/R2 N/A IL
C ISO/R3 N/A X
D ISO/R2 N/A IL
C ISO/R3 N/A X
Group I 09 to 18kg (~9months – 4
B ISO/F2 N/A IUF
years)
B1 ISO/F2X N/A IUF
A ISO/F3 N/A IUF

E - ISO/R1: Infant-Size Rearward-Facing Child Restraint System
Key of letters be inserted in the above table F -ISO/L1: Left Lateral Facing position Child Restraint System
(carry-cot)
IUF: Suitable for ISOFIX forward child restraint systems of universal
category approved for use in this mass group. G - ISO/L2: Right Lateral Facing position Child Restraint System
(carry-cot)
IL: Suitable for particular ISOFIXchild restraint systems (CRS). These
CRS may be are those of the ‘specific vehicle’, ‘restricted’ or ‘semi-
universal’ categories.
Use the manufacturer recommended Child Restraint System
IU: Suitable for using rearward facing child restraint system with (CRS) and locations to fit in vehicle. Please read the installation
ISOFIX & Top-tether (or) ISOFIX Base with Support leg. instructions provided in manual carefully before use.
X: Seat position not suitable ISOFIX child restraint systems in this
mass group and/or this size class. 6.8 Warning for Child Restraint
A - ISO/F3: Full-Height Forward-Facing toddler Child Restraint
System (height 720mm)
B - ISO/F2: Reduced-Height Forward-Facing toddler Child Restraint • Use only the approved Child Restraint System (CRS) for
System (height 650mm) better safety of your child.
B1 - ISO/F2X: Reduced-Height Second Version Back Surface Shape • Mahindra is not responsible for the personal injury and
Forward-Facing toddler Child Restraint System (height 650mm) property damage due to the defect of child restraint system.
• Use the proper type of child restraint system suitable for the
C - ISO/R3: Full-Size Rearward-Facing toddler Child Restraint weight and size for your baby.
System
• Use the child restraint system at recommended seating
D - ISO/R2: Reduced-Size Rearward-Facing toddler Child Restraint location only and follow the instructions.
System

• Child restraint has 5 categories based on the weight as secure the child restraint system only with the seatback
below: anchors. The increased load may cause the hooks or
anchors to break, causing serious injury or death.
GROUP 0 : 0 ~ GROUP II : 15 ~
1 4 • If a child restraint is not properly secured to the vehicle and
10KG 25KG
a child is not properly restrained in the child restraint, the
GROUP 0 + : 0 ~ GROUP III : 22 ~ child could be seriously injured or killed in a collision. Always
2 5
13KG 36KG
follow the instructions provided by the manufacturer for
GROUP I : 9 ~ installation.
3
18KG
• Make sure the latches of the child restraint system are
• Group 0 & 0+ : Rear-facing child restraint fitted on the rear latched to the lower latches. In this case, you can hear the
seat (use of ISOFIX with Base & Support Leg is “click” sound and color indications.
recommended).
• The child restraint seat strap may not work properly if
• Group I: Forward-facing child restraint fitted on the rear seat attached somewhere other than the correct seatback
(use of ISOFIX & Top Tether is recommended). anchor provided on the rear seat base back side behind the
• Group II & III: Booster seat fitted on the rear seat with seat seat carpet. Follow the instructions provided on the seat
belt fastened. Always follow the installation procedure and back for the details of anchor location.
use instructions provided by the manufacturer of the • Make sure that the child restraint system is firmly secured
booster seat. by rocking it in different directions.
• Incorrectly installed child restraint system may cause an
6.9 Cautions for ISOFIX Seat usage unexpected personal injury.
• The anchor provided on rear seat base back is the

supplemental device to secure the child restraint system
after engaging it by the lower latches. Therefore, do not

SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS)
7 SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) 7.1 Airbags
This vehicle is equipped with airbags, Seat belt pretensioners and Your vehicle is equipped with the following airbags:
airbag ECU. The airbags are Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
D r i v e r ’ s A i r b a g : A frontal airbag for the driver in Steering wheel hub
and are designed to provide further protection to the vehicle
occupants in addition to the primary protection provided by the seat
belts and seat belt pre-tensioners.
The primary components of the system are the sensors which
measure the crash severity. In the event of a significant frontal
impact, the SRS airbags inflate to work in conjunction with the seat
belts and help reduce injuries mainly to the driver's and front
passenger's head/chest. 0
1 2
3
4
A/C
Seat belts are the primary restraint system in the vehicle. An

airbag provides supplemental protection in addition to the seat P a s s e n g e r ’ s A i r b a g : A frontal airbag for the front passenger in the
belts. passenger side instrument panel
All occupants, including the driver, should always wear their
seat belts to minimise the risk of severe injury in the event of a
crash.
Airbags are more effective in reducing injuries when the seat
belts are worn.
1 2
3
0 4
A/C

Driver Airbag Front Passenger Airbag

An airbag is not designed to deploy in every type of crash.
Depending on the type of accident or impact, the front airbags
independently deploy thereby protecting the occupants. It is not
necessary that ALL the airbags deploy during an accident.
To minimise the risk of severe injury in the event of a crash, every
passenger must always wear their seat belt (see the chapter on
Seat Belts in this manual). The airbags inflate very quickly with great
force. Do not position any part of your body too close to airbag, you W12F01 W12F02
or especially children could be seriously injured/killed by a deploying

airbag. Front airbag are not intended to deploy in side-impact, rear impact
or rollover crashes. In addition, front airbag will not deploy in frontal
crashes which are below the prescribed deployment threshold
7.2 Driver and Front Passenger Airbag where risk of serious injuries is low.
Your vehicle is equipped with a Supplemental Restraint System
(Airbag) and lap/shoulder belts at both the driver and front
passenger seating positions. The indications of the system's Do not place any objects over the airbag or between the airbag
presence are the letters “AIRBAG” embossed on the airbag pad and yourself.
cover in the steering wheel and the passenger's side front panel
pad above the glove box.
The SRS is designed to deploy the front airbag only when an impact
is sufficiently severe and when the impact angle is less than ± 30°
from the forward longitudinal axis of the vehicle.

7.3 Passenger Air Bag ON/OFF Instruction 2. Press OK button to enter in settings and following screen will
appear.
The front passenger airbag is disabled (not inflatable) when
selecting
passenger airbag ON/OFF Menu button to “OFF” position. Options
will be displayed in the center screen of instrument cluster when
navigating through switch panel provided on the right side of
Instrument panel (Refer Features and Controls section for details).
The following instructions to be followed to select the passenger
airbag ON/OFF
1. Press the MENU button provided in the switch panel and
3. Press Up/Down buttons to navigate to Passenger Airbag ON/
navigate to Settings Option.
OFF option.

4. Once select the Passenger ON/OFF option, Press OK to confirm Passenger Airbag OFF Indicator
selection and following message will appear on screen.
This Warning indicator glows on center fascia switch
on IP when turning the passenger airbag ON/OFF
switch to “OFF” position to disable the passenger
airbag.
Passenger Airbag ON Indicator
This Warning indicator symbol glows on center

fascia switch on IP when selecting the passenger
airbag “ON” option to enable the passenger airbag.
5. Confirm the option by selecting “Ok or Cancel” using Up/Down 7.4 Airbag System Malfunction Lamp
and Press the OK button.
Airbags do not require any regular maintenance of
6. A warning lamp will glow on the center fascia switch indicating of service. The airbag system malfunction lamp
Passenger Airbag ON/OFF to the user. illuminates 6 seconds including precheck when the
7. Repeat the above steps for the Vice-versa of Passenger Airbag ignition is ON, and it turns OFF.
ON/OFF selection. This lamp monitors airbag sensor assembly, airbag sensors,
indicator lamp, seat belt pre-tensioner assemblies, inflators,
interconnecting wiring and power sources.
If either of the following conditions occur, there is a malfunction of
the airbags or seat belt pre-tensioner. Immediately contact your
Authorised Mahindra Dealer.

• The lamp does not glow when the ignition is switched ON or 7.5 Airbag Inflation/Deployment
glows beyond six (6) secs. after switching the ignition ON
The airbag sensors constantly monitor the forward deceleration of
• The lamp comes ON at any other time, even briefly
the vehicle. If an impact results in a forward deceleration beyond
• The lamp comes ON intermittently the designed threshold level, the system triggers the airbag
inflators. This initiates a chemical reaction which quickly fills the
airbags with non-toxic gas.
Never make any modifications to your vehicle which could affect Upon deployment, tear seams moulded directly into the pad covers
the performance of your airbag system. In particular, changes separate under pressure from the expansion of the airbags.
to the vehicle frame, bumpers, bull bar, front fenders, ride Further opening of the covers allows full inflation of the airbags. A
height, suspension, seat belts, interior trim, seats or steering fully inflated airbag, in combination with a properly worn seat belt,
wheel (especially covers, pads or other trim), could prevent slows the driver's or the passenger's forward motion, reducing the
proper deployment of the airbag. If you need to make any risk of head and chest injury.
modifications to accommodate any disability you may have,
please contact your Authorised Mahindra Dealer. After complete inflation, the airbag immediately starts deflating,
enabling the driver to maintain forward visibility and the ability to
Never try to open or strike the airbag cover. If the airbag cover manoeuvre or operate other controls.
is cracked or damaged in any way, the airbag may not function
as intended. Take the vehicle to an Authorised Mahindra Deployment of the airbags happen in a fraction of a second,
Dealer. producing a loud noise releasing a ‘white smoke’ and residue along
with a non-toxic gas. This does not indicate a fire. This smoke may
Even if the airbags do not deploy during an accident, take your remain inside the vehicle for some time, and may cause some
vehicle to an Authorised Mahindra Dealer for a thorough inspection minor irritation to the eyes, skin or breathing. Be sure to wash off
of the airbag and seat belt systems, no matter how minor the any residue with soap and water as soon as possible to prevent any
accident. The airbag system could have been damaged, and may potential skin irritation. If you can safely exit the vehicle, you should
not work as intended in the future, resulting in serious injury. do so immediately.

allow room for airbag inflation, while still allowing you to

properly operate/drive the vehicle
Airbag deployment may cause windshield to break.
The front passenger should never sit on the edge of the seat,
• Do not modify, remove, strike or open the seat belt pre- stand near the glove compartment, rest feet or other parts of
tensioner assemblies, airbag sensor or surrounding area or the body on the dashboard when the vehicle is moving.
wiring. Failure to follow these instructions may prevent them
from activating correctly, cause sudden operation of the
system or disable the system, which could result in serious
injury
• Parts of the airbag module (steering wheel hub, airbag cover
and inflator) may be hot for several minutes after
deployment. The airbags inflate only once
• Do not cover the steering wheel, instrument panel with any
object (e. g. dash panel covers) which may prevent the
W12F03
airbags from inflating properly
• The airbags inflate with considerable force. While the
system is designed to reduce serious injuries, primarily to
the head and chest, it may also cause other, less severe The driver or front passenger who is too close to the steering
injuries to the face, chest, arms and hands. These are wheel or dashboard can be seriously injured during airbag
usually in the nature of minor burns or abrasions and deployment.
swelling, but the force of a deploying airbag can also cause • The driver must sit as far back as possible from the steering
more serious injuries, especially if an occupant's hands, wheel while still maintaining control of the vehicle
arms, chest or head is in close proximity to the airbag
module at the time of deployment. Sit straight and well back • The front passenger must sit as far back as possible from
into the seat. Move your seat as far back as practical to the dashboard

• Sitting improperly or out of position can cause occupants to • Even with airbags, improperly belted and un-belted
be shifted too close to a deploying airbag, strike the interior occupants can be severely injured when the airbag inflates.
structure or be thrown from the vehicle resulting in serious Always follow the precautions about seat belts, airbags and
injury occupant safety contained in this manual
• Do not place items under the front seats. Placing items
under the front seats could interfere with the operation of
the supplemental restraint system sensing components and
wiring harnesses
7.6 Child Restraint and Airbag

CORRECT SEAT BELT
POSITIONING
W12F04
WARNING
WARNING
DO NOT place rear - facing child
seat on this seat with airbag
DEATH OR SERIOUS INJURY

can occur
DO NOT place rear - facing child
seat on this seat with airbag
• Always sit upright with the seat back in an upright position,
DEATH OR SERIOUS INJURY
on the seat cushion centre with your seat belt on, legs can occur
comfortably extended and your feet on the floor
• All vehicle occupants must be properly restrained using the
seat belts “ Do not use a rearward facing child restraint on a seat protected
• All infants and children must be placed in the rear seat of by an airbag in front of it”
the vehicle in a child restraint seat and be properly In addition, do not place front-facing child restraints in the front
restrained by seat belts passenger’s seat either. If the front passenger airbag inflates, it
• Front airbags can injure occupants improperly positioned in could cause serious or fatal injuries to the child.
the front seats

This is indicated also on stickers that are located at the following 7.7 Airbag Deployment
position.
• On the front passenger’s sun visor
Extreme Hazard! Do not use a rear-facing child restraint on a

seat protected by an airbag in front of it!
Never put a child restraint in the front passenger’s seat. If the
front passenger airbag inflates, it can cause serious or fatal
injuries.
Never hold an infant or child on your lap. The infant or child
could be seriously injured in the event of a crash. All infants and
children should be properly restrained in appropriate child
safety seats or seat belts in the rear seat. The images shown in this section are for illustrative purpose
only. They may not look like your model/variant or vehicle.
Instal the child restraint system on the rear outboard seats,
and securely lock the child restraint system in position with the Front Airbag
help of ISOFIX.
Front airbag are designed to inflate in a frontal collision depending
Always Buckle Children (ABC) in the back seat. It is the safest on the intensity, speed or angles of impact of the front collision.
place for children of any age to ride.

7.8 Airbag Non-deployment • Under-ride Situations -
Impacts below a pre-determined threshold level may not cause the

airbag to deploy in the following cases:
• Collision with Utility Poles or Trees -
Airbags may not inflate if the vehicle collides with objects such as
utility poles or trees, where the point of impact is concentrated
to one area and the full force of the impact is not delivered to the
sensors.
Running under a truck may not provide the decelerations

necessary for airbag deployment. Airbags will not inflate in this
“under-ride” situation where deceleration forces that are
detected by sensors are significantly low.
In case of less severe frontal accidents, seatbelts alone are

effective to reduce the severity of injury to occupants,
seatbelt pretensioners may trigger to further reduce the
severity of injury in such accidents and airbags are may not
intended to deploy

Rear-end Collisions - • Frontal Impact -

Frontal airbags are not designed to inflate in rear collisions, Frontal impact beyond 30º range from head-on to the vehicle.
where occupants are moved backward away from the airbags by
the force of the impact. In this case, inflated airbags would not
be able to provide any additional benefit.
300
300
• Potholes or Stepped Surfaces -

Driving into a big pothole, stepped surface or hitting the far side
of a hole/incline will not inflate the airbag.

• Rollover - collision, the force of impact may direct the occupants in a

direction where the airbags would not be able to provide any
additional benefit, and thus the sensors may not deploy any
airbags.
7.9 Airbag Replacement

Self-servicing or tampering with the airbag system is dangerous. An
airbag could accidentally deploy causing serious injuries, or will not
deploy when there is a need. Always take your vehicle to an
Authorised Mahindra Dealer for inspection and repairs.
Airbags will not inflate in rollover accidents where airbag
deployment would not provide protection to the occupants. 7.10 Self Removal SRS Related Parts
Frontal Side Swipe Impact -
Self removing the instrument panel, steering wheel, seat belts or
airbag related parts or sensors is not recommended. Airbags could
accidentally activate and cause serious injuries, or they may not
deploy when there is a need. Visit an Authorised Mahindra Dealer if
these parts must be removed.
7.11 Airbag Disposal
Improper disposal of an airbag or a vehicle with live airbags can be

extremely dangerous. Approach an Authorised Mahindra Dealer to
do these jobs.
Frontal offset impact to the vehicle may not provide the
deceleration force necessary for airbag deployment. In an angled

7.12 Airbag Repair Recommended to visit authorized Mahindra dealer if you found any
SRS warning exist in your vehicle due to malfunction
If the front airbag cover or IP airbag cover shows signs of damage
or having been removed, the vehicle should be towed to the nearest
Authorised Mahindra Dealer for repair. Do not attempt to self
repair or reinstal the cover.
7.13 Airbag Maintenance
For cleaning the airbag covers/areas, use only a soft dry cloth or
one which has been moistened with plain water. Solvents or
cleaners could adversely affect the airbag covers and proper
deployment of the system.
7.14 Airbag ECU Malfunction
Airbag ECU is not water proof and is positioned in the vehicle above
the prescribed Water wading level. Do not drive through deep or
rushing water, recommended to know the depth of the water
before you attempt to drive through it. If your vehicle is enters into
deep or rushing water, like fast-moving streams or flood waters
there will be a risk of water entering into Airbag ECU due to
submerging of vehicle floor and Airbag ECU may be malfunction due
to misuse conditions of vehicle usage. Also extra care to be taken
while washing your vehicle floor with water pipes/Jets and avoid
water/liquid spillage on interiors. Warranty of Airbag ECU will not
be applicable in such cases.

LOCKS AND KEYS
8 LOCKS AND KEYS Key Number Tag:
Your T H A R vehicle comes with Remote Flip key. The keys operate all Your key number is shown on the Aluminium tag attached to the
locks in your vehicle including those of the doors and ignition with key. It is recommended that you record the key number and store in
steering lock. We advise you to keep one of these keys in a safe a safe place.
place for emergency use, but not in the vehicle. Should you lose your
keys or if you need replacement keys, they can be ordered through
an Authorised Mahindra Dealer. There is a limitation (max 2 keys at a time) to the number of
keys that can be programmed. The minimum timeframe
required to supply the duplicate keys is 20 days after all the
formalities are completed. Please contact the Authorised
Mahindra Dealer to understand the formalities involved.
Never leave the key in the ignition switch with children in the
vehicle. A child could switch on the ignition, start the engine,
operate power windows and other controls, or move the
W12G30 vehicle, resulting in personal injuries to the bystanders and/or
children seated inside.
RKE Remote Keyless Entry

LOCKS AND KEYS
8.1 Doors 8.1.2 To Open a Door from Outside
8.1.1 To Open a Door from Inside Pull the door handle firmly outwards to unlock and swing the door
open.
Pull the door lever away from the door and push the door outward
to open.
A B
8.1.3 Locking / Unlocking Individual Doors from Inside

A : Lock B : Unlock
Individual doors can be locked/unlocked from inside by the
respective door lock tabs.
Lift the lock tab outwards to unlock or press the tab inwards to lock
that particular door.

LOCKS AND KEYS
8.1.4 Manual Locking / Unlocking Doors from Outside
The driver door can be manually locked/unlocked from outside by

A B using conventional key. The key is bi-directional; you can insert it into
the keyhole either way. Turn the key anti-clockwise to unlock or
clockwise to lock the door.
A : Lock B : Unlock
B
A
Locking the driver door from inside activates the central locking
system, thereby locking ALL the doors of the vehicle. Refer to
Central Locking section for further details.
A : Unlock B : Lock
A keyhole is provided in the driver door to lock/unlock the

doors manually from outside.
Locking the driver door from outside activates the central

locking system, thereby locking ALL the doors of the vehicle.
Refer to Central Locking section for further details.

LOCKS AND KEYS
8.1.5 Locking / Unlocking the Swing Gate 8.2.1 Central Locking / Unlocking All Doors from
Outside
A To manually lock/unlock all the doors from outside using the

conventional key, turn the key anti-clockwise /clockwise respectively
in the driver door keyhole.
B
A : Unlock B : Lock A
8.2 Central Locking System
All doors of the vehicle including swing gate can be simultaneously A : Unlock B : Lock
locked or unlocked from the driver door.
If any doors are open when central locking is activated, the

system locks the open doors when they are closed.
Central locking ALL the doors in the vehicle can also be done
using the Remote key. Refer the relevant sections in this
chapter for more details.

LOCKS AND KEYS
8.2.2 Central Locking / Unlocking All Doors from Inside 8.2.3 Rear Swing Gate
Press the driver door lock tab down (A) to lock or lift the lock tab up
(B) to unlock all doors simultaneously. A
A B B
A : Unlock B : Lock
A : Lock B : Unlock
Hold flip window and open the swing gate fully and slowly remove
pressure from flip window and it will get open.

LOCKS AND KEYS
A LED
B Lock
C Search (Panic Alarm)
D Unlock
The front side of the RKE has three control buttons, Unlock, Lock
and Search buttons. The Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) system
operates on Radio Frequency (RF). You can insert the key into the
ignition with either side up.
while closing swing gate, first close flip window and hold in place and
close swing gate. 8.3.1 To Lock the Vehicle with RKE
8.3 Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System
5791
B
C 0862
0344
D W12G32
Press the LOCK button on the RKE for locking the vehicle.
W12G31
H a z a r d l a m p s f l a s h o n c e - if all the doors in the vehicle are locked
successfully using RKE.

LOCKS AND KEYS
H a z a r d l a m p s f l a s h f i v e t i m e s a l o n g w i t h a n a l a r m - if any of the 8.3.3 Auto Locking

doors in the vehicle are open. Bonnet should not be considered.
All doors will get locked automatically when;
8.3.2 Unlock the Vehicle with RKE • All doors are closed properly
• Vehicle speed is greater than 20 kmph
A u t o L o c k i n g O N D O O R O P E N — Once the auto lock has been
activated, if any door is opened when the vehicle speed is below 5
kmph, then the auto lock will reactivate only if all doors are closed,
5791
the vehicle speed goes above 20 kmph and the master actuator is
in the unlock position.
A u t o L o c k i n g O N M A S T E R A C T U A T O R U N L O C K — Once the auto lock
0862
has been activated, if the master actuator was unlocked at any
0344
W12G33 vehicle speed, then the auto lock will reactivate only when the
vehicle speed goes below 5 kmph and further crosses 20 kmph.
Press the UNLOCK button on the RKE to unlock and disarm the
vehicle.
8.3.4 Auto Unlocking
‘ M a g i c l a m p s ’ are activated (selected variants) / H a z a r d l a m p s f l a s h
twice Auto Unlock of all doors will happen in the following conditions ;
• When Ignition is switched from ON to OFF, OR
Upon the remote lock, if any of the doors are not closed • In the event of a crash
properly or are left open, the hazard lamps will flash five times
to indicate the same.

LOCKS AND KEYS
8.3.5 Search (Panic) Function Search function is ON, only hazard lamps would flash and alarm
chirps would not be audible.
8.3.6 Mute/Un-mute Function
The horn chirps can be muted / un-muted. Press the LOCK &
5791
SEARCH buttons together for 3 sec. to toggle between MUTE/UN-

MUTE mode. Hazard lamps will flash once to indicate the change in
status.
0862
0344
W12G34
In the un-muted condition, Horn chirps can be heard during

Press the SEARCH/PANIC button on the RKE to locate the vehicle RKE Lock when any of the door open (5 Chirps) .
in a parking lot. Panic alarm can also bring attention to the vehicle
and surrounding area, warning about an intruder or seek for help
In the muted condition, only hazard would flash and horn chirps
when key is in key barrel.
would not be audible.
When the SEARCH/PANIC function is ON, the hazard lamps flash

along with an alarm for 30 sec. In this mode;
• Pressing the SEARCH button again switches OFF the alarm
5791
• Pressing the UNLOCK button switches OFF the alarm and
unlocks all doors
0862
0344
The search function works both during the Locked/Unlocked W12G35
conditions of the vehicle. In the muted condition, When the RKE

LOCKS AND KEYS
8.3.7 RKE Operating Range • If the RKE is still not working correctly, contact an Authorized
Mahindra Dealer
8.3.1 RKE Battery Replacement
If the RKE operation is inconsistent when any of the buttons are

pressed it indicates that the RKE battery is weak.
The rear side of the RKE is snap fitted. Using a small screw driver
or similar tool, pry or separate the two halves of the casing..
Using RKE, you can lock/arm or unlock/disarm the vehicle from

distances approximately 9 m (30 ft) This is in open area.
22
20
R
C
If there is reduction in RKE range, please follow the steps below:
• Check the distance: The RKE may be too far from the vehicle.
Stand closer to the vehicle during rain or bad weather
• Check the location: Other vehicles or objects may be blocking Pull out the batteries and discard the same. Insert new batteries of
the signals. Take a few steps to the left or right, hold the RKE 3V type. While fitting the new battery, ensure the positive side of
higher, and try again. Moreover, closeness to a radio the batteries face up. Align both the halves of the RKE and press to
transmitter such as radio station tower, airport transmitter, snap fit. Check operation of the RKE
mobile or CB radios may lead to reduction in range of RKE
• Check the RKE battery: See battery replacement procedure,
given later in this section

LOCKS AND KEYS
been swallowed or are stuck in any part of the body, seek

medical help immediately.
An inappropriately disposed battery can be harmful to the
environment and human health. Dispose the battery
accordingly to your local law(s) or regulations. 8.3.1.2 Battery Specification
Battery Voltage 3V
While prying the RKE case, take care not to damage the
Battery Capacity 225 mAh
battery.
8.3.3 If RKE is Lost

Do not touch the battery terminals that are on the back
housing or the printed circuit board. If you have lost the programmed RKE, contact an Authorized
Pull out the battery and discard the same. Insert new battery of Mahindra Dealer for procuring a new RKE.
same type. While fitting the new battery, ensure the positive
While programming a new key set, you will have to submit all the
side of the batteries face up. Align both the halves of the RKE
keys available with you to an Authorized Mahindra Dealer.
and screw to tight fit. Check operation of the RKE.
There is a limitation (max 2 keys at a time) to the number of

This product contains a lithium button cell. If the button cell is
keys that can be programmed. The minimum time frame
swallowed, severe internal burns can occur within a mere two
required to supply the duplicate keys is 20 days after all the
hours and lead to death.
formalities are completed. Please contact the dealer to
Keep new or removed batteries away from children. If the understand the formalities involved.
battery compartment does not close securely, discontinue use
If the key is stolen or lost, communicate to an Authorized
and keep away from children. If you think that batteries have
Mahindra Dealer to de-activate the function of the lost or stolen

LOCKS AND KEYS
key. This is essential to avoid unauthorized access using the 8.4.1 Features of the Immobiliser System:
misplaced key.
Only RKE transmitters programmed to your vehicle electronics • Prevents the vehicle being started by anyone not in possession
can be used for remote locking and unlocking of your vehicle. of the correct vehicle key
• The vehicle is automatically protected after the key is removed
8.3.4 Precautions while Handling RKE: from the ignition. At every ignition ON, if the vehicle does not
recognise the correct key code, the engine check lamp will
• Do not cover the key grip with any material that cuts off RF illuminate/blink and the engine cannot be started
waves • The vehicle will not be protected until the key has been taken out
• Do not leave the key exposed to high temperatures for a long of the ignition
period, such as on the dashboard or hood under direct sunlight
• Do not put the key in any liquid or wash it in an ultrasonic washer
If the engine check lamp flashes or remains continuously
illuminated after the ignition being switched ON, there is a
8.4 Engine Immobiliser System system malfunction. Contact an Authorised Mahindra Dealer
immediately.
An Engine Immobiliser System is a security system that prevents
the vehicle from being operated by an unauthorised keys. The Inserting the correct coded key in the ignition and switching the
Engine immobiliser prevents the engine from being started unless it ignition ON, automatically deactivates the system. This enables the
recognises signals from the correct coded key. engine to start.
The system is automatically activated when the key is removed

from the ignition.
In the event of the vehicle not starting with the correct key,
switch off the ignition for a minimum of 1 minute and attempt
to start the vehicle again.

LOCKS AND KEYS
Do not modify, remove or disassemble the engine immobiliser

system. Any unauthorised changes or modifications can affect
proper operation of the system and will void your warranty.
The security system will be activated only when the vehicle is

locked using the Smart Key. Locking the doors with the manual
key will not activate the security system.
Using the ignition key to open the door, when the vehicle was
locked and armed with Smart Key will be treated as
unauthorised by the system setting on the alarm. Press the
unlock button on the Smart Key to cancel the alarm.

LOCKS AND KEYS

R1 3 5
246
FEA TURES AND CONTROL
R1 3 5
9 FEATURES AND CONTROL 246
9.1 Power Windows
A BB
Power windows can be operated only when the ignition is “IGN”

position.
Front Passenger Window Driver Door Window Do not operate the power windows frequently when the engine
A B is OFF. This will drain the vehicle battery.
Switch Switch
If you operate the switch often during a short period of time,
The front switch controls the window winding functions of both the system might become inoperable for a certain duration to
doors of the vehicle and is located on the floor console. prevent damage due to overheating. The system will return to
To lower/raise the window glass push/pull the respective power normal functioning shortly. It is recommended operating one
window switch. window switch at a time.
While operating the power windows, check for obstructions like

a head, hand, etc. which may lead to personal injuries.

FEATURES AND CONTROL
9.2 Rear Swing Gate
To manually lock/unlock all the doors from outside using the

conventional key, turn the key anti-clockwise /clockwise respectively
in the rear swing door keyhole.
A
Hold flip window and open the swing gate fully and slowly remove
pressure from swing gate and it will get open.
A : Unlock B : Lock while closing swing gate, first close flip window and hold in place and
close swing gate.

9.3 Outside Rear View Mirror (ORVM) 9.3.1 Electric ORVM Adjustment (if equipped)
The electric exterior mirror adjustment switch is located on the

driver door hand rest. The joystick on the switch can be used to
select the left/right mirror and also to adjust the respective mirror.
R
Integrated exterior rear view mirrors on both the sides facilitate
O
maximum rear view information to the driver.
L
Both the ORVM’s are hinged and can be manually folded or
unfolded. This avoids hindrances in narrow areas and parking slots.
Make sure that you fully engage the mirror in its support, while
folding or unfolding.
Do not overestimate the distance of the objects that you see in

the mirrors. Objects seen in convex mirrors are much closer
than they appear.

9.4 Interior Mirror 9.5 Exterior Lamps
The lighting control stalk is located on the right hand side of the
steering wheel. It controls operations of parking lamps, head lamps,
head lamp beam selection, high beam flashing, fog lamps (if
equipped) and turn signals when the ignition switch is ON.
The interior mirror has day and night (anti-glare) positions. The
night position reduces glare from head lamps of vehicles behind
you. Flip the tab on the bottom edge of the mirror to select the day
or night position.

9.5.1 Turn Signals • After you have completed your left turn, the stalk will
automatically return to the neutral position switching OFF all the
lamps
A
If the turn signal lamps on the instrument panel flash faster

than normal, there may be a possibility that one or more of the
turn signal lamp bulbs have blown. Replace the blown bulb
B
immediately.
Lane Changing
To signal a lane change, move the light control stalk clockwise or

A Turn Signal - Left B Turn Signal - Right anti-clockwise to the limit point of free movement of the lever and
release. The turn signals will flash three times and stop.
Taking a Right Turn :
The turn signals will continue flashing as long as the lighting control
• Push the lighting control stalk clockwise to indicate a right turn. stalk is held in the limit point of free movement.
The instrument cluster arrow lamp pointing towards the right
flashes along with the right side turn signal lamps (front & rear)
with chime indicating your intention of turning towards right
After you have completed your right turn, the stalk will automatically
return to the neutral position switching OFF all the lamps.
Taking a Left Turn :
• Push the lighting control stalk anti-clockwise to indicate a left
turn. The instrument cluster arrow lamp pointing towards the
left flashes along with the left side turn signal lamps (front &
rear) with chime indicating your intention of turning towards left

9.5.2 Lamps Off Rotate the outer rotary switch on the lighting control stalk aligning
the ‘arrow’ on the switch to the ‘1st détente’ position on the stalk to
Rotate the outer rotary switch on the lighting control stalk aligning switch ON the parking lamps.
the ‘arrow’ on the switch to ‘O’ on the stalk to switch OFF all lamps.
The tail lamp, license plate lamp, front park lamp and
instrument panel illumination lamps are activated when the
parking lamp is switched ON.
9.5.4 Head Lamp On

Rotate the outer rotary switch on the lighting control stalk aligning
the ‘dot’ on the switch to the ‘2nd détente’ position on the stalk to
switch ON the head lamps.
9.5.3 Parking Lamps On

9.5.5 Daytime Running Lamp (DRL) (if applicable) 9.5.6 Head Lamp High Beam/Low Beam
To enable DRL;
• Whenever the engine is in running condition and park switch is in A
OFF position, DRL is enabled
To disable DRL;
• Whenever the engine is in running condition and park lamp is B
ON, DRL will get switch to park mode
A Low Beam B High Beam
With the head lamp low beam ON, push the lighting control stalk
If customer does’nt want the DRL to be ON, he can disable
down (away) from steering wheel to switch ON the head lamp high
through infotainment settings. Refer to Infotainment e-manual.
beam. The head lamp high beam telltale lamp in the instrument
cluster illuminates indicating high beam option selected. For low
beam, pull the stalk back up.
Your vehicle head lamps are vented and moisture may be

collected on the inside of the head lamp lens under certain
climatic and geographical conditions. This moisture will
evaporate once the head lamps have been switched ON for a
few minutes.

9.5.7 Head Lamp Flash
3
2
1
W52H22
Switch Vehicle Loading Condition

Position
Pull the lighting control stalk (from the head lamp low beam 0 Driver only or Driver with front passenger
position) towards the steering wheel to instantaneously flash the
1 Driver + Front passenger + Rear seat occupied
head lamp high beam. The head lamp flash works even when the
head lamp is OFF. 2 All seats occupied
All seats occupied with luggage OR Driver with luggage at
3
9.5.8 Head Lamp Levelling System extreme rear side
When the vehicle is either fully or partially loaded, it may have an Select the suitable switch position depending on the pay load as
upward inclination disturbing the head lamp aiming. A correct head advised in the table.
lamp setting provides good visibility to the driver with minimum
inconvenience to other road users.
The headlights can only be adjusted when the low beam is
To properly aim the head lamp beam, use the head lamp levelling switched ON.
switch. This switch is located on the right side of the steering
column shroud in the instrument panel. This switch has three
positions marked as 0, 1 & 2.

9.5.9 Hazard on Panic Braking Align the inner rotary switch on the lighting control stalk to the fog
lamp off ‘O’ on the inner fixed stalk as shown to switch OFF the fog
Hazard Lamps are turned ON during panic braking for 10 sec when lamps.
the following conditions are met;
Front Fog Lamps ON
• Ignition is ON
To switch ON the front fog lamps, switch ON the ignition and the
• Vehicle speed is greater than 100 kmph parking lamps. Turn the inner rotary switch on the lighting control
• Brake is applied stalk to align to the fog lamp symbol on the inner fixed stalk as
shown.
• Sudden High deceleration Rate
The front fog lamp indicator in the instrument cluster indicates the
operation status.
9.5.10 Fog Lamps (if equipped)
Fog lamps are to be used along with the head lamp low beam, to
improve the vision during foggy and misty conditions.
Fog Lamps OFF
Fog lamps will turn ON only if the parking lamp is ON.

FEATURES AND CONTROL 1 2
3
0 4
A/C
The Front fog lamp indicator in the instrument cluster indicates

even if fog lamp is not fitted in the vehicle.
The Rear fog lamp indicator in the instrument cluster indicates

even if fog lamp is not fitted in the vehicle.
9.5.11 Hazard Warning Lamp

The hazard warning lamp switch is located below the AC controls Hazard lamps are also switched ON during the following
on the instrument panel. Use the hazard warning lamp when your conditions;
vehicle is stationary or to warn other road users to be cautious
while passing your vehicle. • Crash — Hazard would be turned on for 30 mins
To turn the hazard warning lamp ON, press the switch input. All the • Panic Braking — When the vehicle is running above 100
turn signal lamps flash. To turn OFF, press the switch again. kmph and panic/sudden brakes are applied, hazard will turn
on for 10 sec
Pressing the hazard switch twice deactivates this feature.

9.6 Follow-Me Home (FMH) RKE • Ignition off to any other states
• FMH ON 20 seconds expires
This feature helps the driver and passengers to easily get out of the
vehicle during poor light conditions. The head lamp low beam is • Max time of 3 mins has elapsed and no extension of FMH
turned ON for about 20 seconds, assisting the passengers to find
their way unless cancelled by the UNLOCK signal from the RKE. With FMH mode ON, if the UNLOCK signal is received twice from
RKE; the feature gets deactivated and cannot be extended further.
To enable FMH; Also, the doors are unlocked and vehicle disarmed.
• Ignition transition from ON to OFF
• Park lamp ON to OFF
9.7 Follow-Me Home (FMH) Non RKE
• Ignition key is out This feature helps the driver and passengers to easily get out of the
vehicle during poor light conditions. The head lamp low beam is
• Double press RKE LOCK turned ON for about 20 seconds, assisting the passengers to find
• Head lamp low beam will turn ON for 20 seconds unless their way.
cancelled by the UNLOCK signal
To enable FMH;
To extend FMH;
• Ignition transition from ON to OFF
• The first RKE LOCK command will be used for locking all doors
• Park lamp ON to OFF
• Successive RKE LOCK commands will be used for toggling the
current status of the head lamp low beam • Ignition key is out
• Each time FMH is extended, the head lamp low beam will be • Open Driver door
kept/turned on for the next 20 seconds • Head lamp low beam will turn ON for 20 seconds
• If no extension is provided for 3 mins, FMH will get expired To disable FMH
To disable FMH • FMH ON 20 seconds expires
• Park lamp transition from OFF to ON • Park lamp transition from OFF to ON

9.8 Lead Me to Vehicle (LMV) (RKE) • Ignition off to any other states
• LOCK command is received from RKE
LMV is the feature that switches the head lamp ON in low beam for
20 sec helping the passengers to reach the parked vehicle safely • Park lamp is switched ON
and comfortably at night.
To enable LMV; 9.9 Interior Lamps
• Ignition key is out
Interior lamps comprise of roof lamps and ignition key ring
• Park lamps OFF illumination. These lamps can be used for an illuminated entry. In
auto mode, the roof lamps and ignition key ring illuminate when any
• Press UNLOCK button twice on the RKE of the doors are opened. Once all doors are closed, the interior
• System will unlock all doors and disarm the vehicle followed by lamps switch OFF.
head lamp turning ON for 20 sec
9.9.1 Roof Lamps (If equipped)
If FMH has already expired, LMV would turn ON in the 2nd

Press RKE Unlock.
To extend LMV;
• Successive UNLOCK commands received from RKE is used for
toggling the current status of the head lamp low beam
• Each time LMV is extended the low beam will be kept/turned on
for next 20 seconds
To disable LMV;
• LMV ON 20 seconds expires The Roof lamp is located in the roof above the front & Rear seats.
The lamp can be switched on using the switch on the lamp.

Permanent ON • If any of the doors are not closed properly, then the Roof lamps
switch OFF automatically after a preset duration (during Key
Roof Lamp Permanent OFF
removal from key Barrel) or once the vehicle speed > 20 kmph
Door/Auto Mode
• Roof lamps go OFF with ignition ON and all doors closed properly
Do not leave the Roof lamp in permanent ON mode. This will 9.10 Power Outlet
drain your vehicle battery.
The 12V power supply socket provided for power take OFF
The Roof lamp switch has three operation modes to choose from; depending on the vehicle variant. Electrical equipment/appliances
like mobile phone charger, cigarette lighter, etc. can be used in the
1 . The lamp remains permanently ON in this position irrespective of outlets. The power outlet is rated 12V/120W when the engine is
the door open status ON.
2 . The lamp remains permanently OFF in this position The power outlet is located in the floor console ahead of the gear
3 . The lamp remains in AUTO mode in this position. The operation lever
of the Roof lamp in Auto mode is as follows; A/C
• Roof lamp switches ON, dims and goes OFF after a preset delay
once RKE unlock is performed
• Roof lamp switches ON when any of the doors is/are open
• Roof lamp switches ON when Ignition on to ignition off all doors
closed condition
• Roof lamps dim and go OFF after a preset delay upon closing of
all doors during IGN OFF condition
• Roof lamps dim and go OFF immediately on RKE lock or manual
key lock after all doors are closed

Do not modify, disassemble or repair the power outlet in any Accessories that draw higher power (i. e., coolers, vacuum
way. Doing so may result in unexpected malfunction or fire, cleaners, etc.) will drain the battery quickly and may damage
which could cause serious damage to equipment and/or the power outlet.
personal injuries. Contact an Authorized Mahindra Dealer for
any necessary repairs. • Use the power outlets only when the engine is running.
Remove the plug from the power outlet after using the
electric device. Using the power outlets when the engine is
OFF or leaving the electric device plugged in for many hours
To prevent injuries and accidents, secure all electrical may cause the battery to drain
appliances before use. Do not use any appliance that may: • Do not use the power outlet to connect electric accessories
• Distract the driver while driving, or hamper safe driving or equipment that are not designed to operate on 12V
• Result in a fire or burn injuries due to the appliance rolling, • Some electronic devices can cause electronic interference
falling or overheating when plugged into the power outlet. These devices may
cause excessive audio noise and may interfere with other
• Emit steam, while the windows of the passenger electronic systems or devices in your vehicle
compartment are closed
• Never use the power outlet for electric heaters while
sleeping
• Never insert foreign objects into the power outlet
• Never use malfunctioning electrical appliances
• Never insert inappropriate or badly fitting plugs into the
power outlet

9.11 AUX and USB Ports 9.12 Windshield Wipers
The AUX and USB ports are provided on the centre console below 9.12.1 Wiper Control Stalk
the switch bank.
The wipe/wash function can be activated only when the ignition is in
USB(A) / AUX(B) can be used as an input to the music system. You “IGN” position.
can connect iPods, USB memory sticks, etc. as an input and listen
to the music through the vehicle speakers. E
HI
C HI LO
HI
LO
M OF
LOISTF
MI FHI
OF PU
ST LL
OFF
MIST LOHPU
I LL
PULL
OFFL
O PULL
B MIST
F
OF T
PU
LL
MIS
A B C U42H43
A Flick Wipe (MIST)

B Off
A LH Charging USB Ports (if equipped)
C Intermittent (INT)
B AUX Jack
D Low Speed (LO)
C RH USB Port High Speed (HI)
E
USB (C) can be used only for charging.
9.12.2 Wiper Off
The wipe function is OFF when the wipe control stalk is in neutral
position (B).

9.12.3 Flick-Wipe (Mist) 9.12.5 Low Speed Wiping
Push the wipe control stalk to position A for a flick-wipe, hold to Push the wipe control stalk up to the position D to operate the
operate the wipe continuously (simultaneously lift the wiper stalk wiper at a fixed low speed.
towards the steering wheel to operate the wash). The stalk
automatically comes back to position B when released.
9.12.6 High Speed Wiping
9.12.4 Intermittent (INT) Mode Push the wiper control stalk up to position E to operate the wiper at
a fixed high speed.
Intermittent (INT) wiping is selected when the wipe control stalk is
pushed down to position C. In the INT mode, the wiper operates on
preset intervals. 9.12.7 Wipe/Wash
The delay between each wipe can be programmed from 1 to 60

sec according to the rain by the user.
Programming of the INT delay time is as follows;
• Turn the wiper stalk to position C, wiper will start wiping
• Turn the wiper stalk to OFF position, before wiper starts second
wipe
• Turn the wiper stalk to position C again after the required delay
and the same delay will be programmed
• On keeping wiper ON position C, the wiper will wipe again with the Pull/Lift the wiper control stalk towards the steering wheel from
programmed delay any position to activate the front wipe/wash function. Washer fluid
is sprayed on the front windshield and the wipers wipe the
windshield 3 times after the washer spray is stopped and wipe once

after 4 sec. Hold the stalk in position for continuous spray of

washer fluid.
Washer fluid is taken from the reservoir in the engine
compartment.
Using the windshield washer in freezing temperatures could be

dangerous. The washer fluid could freeze on the windshield and
block your vision, resulting in an accident. If you operate your
vehicle in temperatures below 4° C, use washer fluid with
In the front, a single nozzle with twin adjustable washer jets is antifreeze protection.
provided on the applique below the wiper. Using a pin, the eye ball
jets can be adjusted precisely for direction. Always direct the
washer jet to hit the middle of the windshield. This will enable the
wiper blade to wipe the complete width of the windshield. • Do not operate the wipers when the windshield is dry. It may
lead to scratches on the glass
• It is recommended not to use the wiper when the windshield
glass is covered with debris, snow or leaves. Clean the glass
before using the wiper to avoid dmage to the wiper blades
and glass
• Do not operate the windshield washer when the reservoir is
empty

A
B
9.13 Utility Holders Never place objects other than cups or cans in the cup holder.
These objects can be thrown out in the event of a sudden stop
9.13.1 Can/Cup/Bottle Holders (if equipped) or an accident, possibly injuring the passengers in the vehicle.
9.13.2 Glove Box
The instrument panel houses a glove box on the passenger side.

It is also recommended to keep copies of all vehicle documents in
the glove box for reference when needed.
A/C
A/C
There are cup/can/bottle holders in the front floor console next to

the park brake lever, in the front/rear and back door trims. There
is also a storage space on the instrument panel above the centre
vents for mobiles and other small items.
Only sealed or cups with lids are to be used in the cup holders.
Use caution when using the cup holders. A spilled beverage Do not overload the glove box.
that is very hot can injure the driver or passengers. Spilled Do not store loose or small metal objects inside the glove box.
liquids can also damage interior trim and electrical This will lead to rattling while the vehicle is driven on bad roads.
components.
Any spilled beverage can also startle the driver and cause loss
of control of the vehicle, resulting in an accident.

9.14 Grip Handle and Coat Hook

To avoid the possibility of injury in case of an accident or a Grip Handle
sudden stop, the glove box lid should be kept closed when the
vehicle is in motion. The grip handles are provided above the front row outboard seats.
9.13.3 Sun Visor
The sun visors can be used for either frontal or sideward shade, to
reduce glare or to shut out direct rays of the sun. The sun visor can
be swivelled to the side, to provide shade from the glare of the sun.
Luggage Hook
The Luggage hook is available in the back side of the passenger

seat for hang the shopping bag or other suitable objects on the
hook. This hook is not designed for large or heavy items.
In certain variants, a vanity mirror is provided on the back of the To avoid breaking the hook, do not hang items heavier than 3kg.
front passenger sun visor.

9.15 Horn
1 2
3
0 4
A/C
Electronic horn is fitted in this vehicle.

Make sure the weight is not hung on the front seat back hook
during the reclining of Co-driver seat. Press the horn pad on the steering wheel to sound the horn.
The horn functions, even when the ignition has been switched OFF.
Hang light weight articles only. Hanging excess / bulky weight
items may cause breakage of the hook and inconvenience to The horn will get deactivated in below conditions:
the passenger.
• If the horn pad is pressed continuously for more than 10 secs.

• When horn pad is released

9.16 Speakers & Tweeters 9.17 Washable floor mats (If equipped)
S p e a k e r s : Speakers are located on the bottom of Instrument panel Floor mats are washable type, Which can be removed and refixed
and roof central member near twitters. by customer.
A/C
T w e e t e r s : Tweeters are located on the roof panel.

9.18 Switch Bank (If equipped)
Driver side Switch bank is located on the RH side of driver on the
Instrument panel.
You can check the vehicle information and choose vehicle settings
using the switches.

1 2 3 9.20 Roof Tops
Fixed Soft Top Convertible Soft Top
Hard Top
6 5 4
S.NO Switches
1 ESP ON/OFF Switch 4 Select Switch
There are three different types of roof tops are using in the vehicle.
2 Up Switch 5 Down Switch
1. Fixed soft Top
3 Menu Switch 6 HDC Switch
This is canopy type of roof top. Which can be removed and refitted
only at Mahindra Authorised Dealer.
9.19 Voice Messaging System(VMS) (If equipped)
2. Convertible soft Top
A state-of-the-art system, the Voice Messaging System (VMS) is
provided to monitor and announce various warnings in your vehicle. This is also canopy type of roof top. Which can be Fold and unfold by
This is in addition to the warnings on the instrument cluster. VMS is customer.
a unique gadget, which provides security to you and your vehicle. It
3. Hard Top
monitors specific fault signals from your vehicle.
This is fixed roof top which can not removable.

Unzipp the convertible soft top rear window as shown in the image.
Hardtop assembly must be removed and refitted only at

Mahindra Authorised dealer end.
Mind your head for injury on account of sharp edges of HMSL

body while maneuvering near tailgate with roof top glass open
condition.
: Zipping
9.21 Convertible Soft Top Fold and Unfold
Open the swing gate and remove the convertible soft top rear Unlock the LH and RH rear quarter window Hook.
sliding belt rail RH and LH from tailgate bar locking.
Quarter Window LH
Tailgate Bar Locking
Quarter Window RH

Unzipp the convertible soft top quarter window LH and RH as Slide the convertible soft top complete assembly to the rear side.
shown in the image.
Quarter Window LH
Quarter Window LH
: Zipping
Unlatching the both LH and RH latch top at front header.
Latch Top At Front Header

INSTRUMENT CLUSTER FEATURES
10 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER FEATURES 10.1 Instrument Cluster
A B C D
C H G F E C
N o t e : Images in the cluster owner's manual is representation for high end. Low end cluster will have similar images in gray scale.

INSTRUMENT CLUST ER FEA TURES
10.1.1 Tachometer
The tachometer indicates the real-time engine speed in thousands

of RPM (revolutions per minute). Each division is 500 RPM. The vehicle speedometer
Operating the engine at very high RPM may lead to excessive is affected by size of the
engine wear and low fuel economy. Maintain steady engine speed tyres used. If the size of
below 2500 RPM and do not accelerate or decelerate abruptly. the tyres are changed
from those fitted at the
Diesel Petrol factory, the speedometer
might not display the
correct road surface
speed and distance
travelled.
Over Speed Alert Buzzer
• P r i m a r y l e v e l : Buzzer will • S e c o n d a r y l e v e l : Buzzer will

N
trigger single chime in every trigger periodic chime
110 seconds when the when the vehicle speed
vehicle speed reaches 80 reaches 120 kmph and
kmph. once primary level chime will continue playing
chime is triggered, it will until vehicle speed is
Do not over-accelerate the engine during idling, this can cause continue playing until speed is reduced to 114 kmph.
severe engine damage and would be treated as abuse of the reduced to 76 kmph or goes Below this speed primary
engine which is not covered by warranty. beyond 120 kmph. level chime will be
triggered and will continue
10.1.2 Speedometer till 76 kmph.
The speedometer indicates the real-time road surface speed of the

vehicle in kilometres per hour.

10.1.3 Odometer
When the fuel level reaches the reserve, the last bar will be
displayed and low fuel telltale will be ON (approx 12 litres). when the
The odometer records and displays the total distance traveled in fuel tank is completely empty, last bar goes off from display and low
km. Odometer cannot be reset. fuel telltale will be blinking . The amount of fuel required to fill the
tank up may be less than the specified tank capacity, as a small
amount of reserve fuel always remains in the tank.
10.1.4 Fuel Level Gauge
On inclines or curves, due to the movement of fuel in the tank, the
The fuel level gauge functions only when the ignition is switched ON. fuel level may fluctuate or the last bar may flash earlier than usual.
It gives the status of the fuel level in the fuel tank. F indicates the Always check the fuel level when the vehicle is on level road. If the
tank is full (57 +/— 2 Litres), E indicates the tank is empty. last bar is still off and telltale is blinking even after filling sufficient
fuel, contact your Authorised Mahindra Dealer as soon as possible.
When all the bars in the display starts blinking/flashing,

contact the nearest Authorised Mahindra Dealer at the
earliest.

If gauge is showing 7 or more than 7 bars, it represents that

engine is overheating. This will also be notified through blinking or
It is highly recommended to start the fueling at ignition OFF continuously ON Engine high temperature lamp.
condition and turn on the ignition only when fueling is finished to
get correct fuel level.
Never remove the Degassing tank cap when the engine is hot.
The engine coolant is under pressure and could splash on to
IGN ON fuel filling may lead to inconsistency and can cause for skin/eyes causing severe burns. Wait for the engine to cool
DTE fluctuation. down before adding coolant to the reservoir.
Do not continue driving the vehicle with an overheated engine.
10.1.5 Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge This will lead to damage of engine components and engine
seizure.
The engine coolant temperature gauge functions only when the

ignition is switched ON. It indicates the instantaneous engine
coolant temperature. The coolant temperature varies with changes
in weather, load on engine and driving pattern.

10.2 Gear information 10.3 Outside Ambient Temperature (If equipped)
Gear information shows the actual gear in which user has to drive This Screen shows the outside ambient temperature.
the vehicle.
Based on the various parameters, it will also suggest to change the
gear for better fuel economy with up/down recommendation.
Changing the Units (TFT)
Changing the unit of OAT display in cluster settings.

1. Browse to settings, using MENU
2. Press OK to enter.
3. Select Temperature Unit to change unit.

10.4 Instrument Cluster Control Switches 1 UP button: Used to scroll vertically

2 DOWN button: Used to scroll vertically
Driver side switch bank, located right of driver on the front panel
MENU button: Horizontal scrolling i.e., change in
3
menu
1 3 4 OK button: Select a option
2 4

10.5 Instrument Cluster Screen flow (If equipped)
Menu
Fuel Digital Vehicle Warning
Drive Info Settings
Computer Speedometer Info History
Trip A AFE,IFE TDMS

Digital Warning 1 Setting 1
(if equipped)
Average Speedometer
DTE
speed, drive 4x4 Warning 2 Setting 2
time for trip A power
flow
Trip B
Average Warning X Setting X

speed, drive
time for trip B
Clock
REGEN*
*When REGEN is activated

10.6 Drive Information
Drive Information or Drive info is represented by Steering wheel Trip meter has to be reset whenever battery is disconnected
icon. due to various reasons.
It can be accessed by pressing MENU button in driver side switch Else A v e r a g e S p e e d and D r i v i n g T i m e may not match with trip
bank. value.
10.6.1 Trip Meter 10.6.2 Average Speed
Two trip meters are available with max range of 9999.9 km. These Average Speed is calculated based on the total distance covered
are available in drive info menu and can be accessed using UP/ and time taken from the start of this trip cycle.
DOWN switch. Under drive info menu, this page can be accessed using UP/
Trip meter can be reset by long press of OK. Resetting trip will DOWN button. Data on this page can be reset at their respective
reset average speed and drive time associated with the particular trip pages.
trip.

10.6.3 Driving Time 10.6.4 Clock Screen
Drive Duration is the elapsed time from the start of this trip cycle.
Under drive info menu, this page can be accessed using UP/
DOWN button. Data on this page can be reset at their respective
trip pages.
Steps to set time
1. Browse to settings, using MENU button

2. Press OK to enter.
Drive Duration is the elapsed time from the start of this trip cycle.
3. Select Clock and then clock setting to change system time.
This trip timer will reset to 00:00, once it has reached the 4. Press OK to change to particular digit. Highlight will change
maximum value of 99:59. to "Dash". In this state, you can use UP/DOWN button to
change time.
5. Press OK to confirm the current change and move to next
digit.
6. System time will change only when you confirm the edited
time.

10.7 Drive Summary

For high end, clock is in sync with infotainment. Any change in
infotainment will reflect on cluster.
1
10.6.5 REGEN
2
3
This screen will appear when Ignition is turned off. Following

information will be displayed:
1. Distance in IGN cycle
- It displays the total distance travelled in an Ignition cycle.
This page will appear only when vehicle is capable of Park
regeneration (DPF lamp ON or Blinking) along with REGEN telltale. 2. Drive time in IGN cycle
- It displays the total time for which engine was ON in the
Long Press Ok button to start Park regeneration.
Ignition cycle.
3. 4x4 not engaged in distance
Refer fuel emission control section for details on Park
regeneration. - It represents the total distance since any of the 4 wheel
drive modes were not engaged.

- It will reset only if any of the 4 wheel drive modes are

engaged
4. DTE
- It represents the current DTE value.
10.8 Fuel Computer
Fuel computer is represented by fuel tank icon. It can be accessed

using MENU button. It displays data related to fuel consumption
pattern of vehicle.
It can be accessed by pressing MENU button in driver side switch 10.8.2 Instantaneous Fuel Economy (IFE)
bank.
10.8.1 Average Fuel Efficiency (AFE)
In Fuel Computer, AFE can be accessed using UP/DOWN button.

AFE is calculated based on the Last AFE reset cycle.
AFE can be reset by long press of OK button in driver side switch
bank.
Instantaneous Fuel Economy is calculated based on your current

driving pattern. More bars on display means vehicle is consuming
less fuel, less number of bars implies it is consuming more fuel.

10.8.3 Distance to Empty (DTE) 10.9 Digital Speedometer
Distance to Empty is the approximate distance that can be covered

with the available fuel. In Fuel Computer, DTE can be accessed using
UP/DOWN button.
Digital speedometer displays the speed of the vehicle numerically. It

provides immersive experience by having option to switch off the
lights of Speedometer and Tachometer.
Turning the lights off
Once in Digital Speedometer screen, Long Press OK button to turn

the lights OFF. Long press the OK button to turn ON the lights again.

10.10 Vehicle Information
10.10.1 Tire Direction Monitoring System (If equipped)
This feature is available as an Alert as well as standalone page.

A l e r t : Intuitively notifies the user before start of drive. Alert will
trigger if conditions are met. Refer alert section. . Based on
direction alert may go out or can be continuously ON.
10.10.2 Four Wheel Drive
Area represented in circle 1 to be represents current 4 wheel drive

(4WD) mode.
Alerts will Pop-up when either of 4WD High or Low is engaged.
Alert:
S t a n d a l o n e p a g e : User can navigate to this page to check current

direction of tire even while driving.

1. Any mode to 4WD High: alert with “4H” and animation will 10.11 Warning History
be displayed
2. Any mode to 4WD Low: alert with “4L” and animation will be
displayed.
In standalone page: OK
This feature allows you to check the live warnings in the instrument
cluster. It is represented by exclamation mark inside a triangle.
Steps to access:
1. If 4WD High is currently engaged, it will show “4H” with 1. Use Menu Switch to access the warning history.
animation. 2. Once you are on screen as in Figure 1, Press OK to enter
the warning history.
2. Similarly for 4WD Low, it will show “4L” with animation.
3. If 4WD lever is at 2WD or Neutral, only wheels and axles will 3. Use Up/Down to access all the available warning.
be shown without any animation. Warning X/Y: Y represents total live warnings at current time

10.12 Settings
Settings can be accessed by pressing MENU switch
To enter inside settings, press OK.

Following settings are available:
1. Clock (if sync not available)
2. Temperature unit (if applicable)
3. Passenger Airbag
Applicable alerts will be stored in warning history until they are

live.

1. Clock (if sync not available) 10.12.1 Passenger Air Bag ON/OFF
Clock Time Format The following instructions to be followed to select the passenger
airbag ON/OFF
1. Press the MENU button provided in the switch panel and
navigate to Settings Option.
2. Temperature unit (if

3. Passenger Airbag
applicable)
2. Press OK button to enter in settings and following screen will
appear.

3. Press Up/Down buttons to navigate to Passenger Airbag ON/ 6. Repeat the above steps for the Vice-versa of Passenger Airbag
OFF option. ON/OFF selection.
10.12.2 Vehicle Condition Related Warning (if equipped)
Following are the warning information available:
Display Operating Conditions
This alert will come when ABS related

malfunction is detected
4. Once select the Passenger ON/OFF option, Press OK to confirm
selection and following message will appear on screen.
This alert will come when EBD related

malfunction is detected
This message is displayed when the engine

check warning lamp is turned ON and engine
has been running.
5. Confirm the option by selecting “Ok or Cancel” using Up/Down
and Press the OK button.

Display Operating Conditions Display Operating Conditions
This message comes when engine

This message comes on when the ESP system temperature high telltale is ON and engine has
is faulty, and engine has been running. been running. Indicates that engine
temperature is high.
This message will get pop up when HDC

This message comes when cruise mode is control is necessary. HDC actively controlling
turned OFF manually using switch. the brakes to maintain vehicle speed while
descending hills
This message will get pop up when HDC

This message comes when cruise mode is feature is disabled by pressing the HDC button
turned ON. in console again or HDC activation conditions
are override.
This message will pop up when HDC feature is

When the engine oil pressure warning light is enabled by pressing the HDC button in console.
ON and engine has been running. HDC function is ready for action but activation
conditions are not met.

Display Operating Conditions Display Operating Conditions
This alert will come when Remote key fob This message comes when passenger airbag
battery is low . (if Equipped). is turned OFF.
This alert will be displayed when key is left in

This message comes when you try to move the
barrel and IGN is turned OFF and door is
vehicle when park brake is still engaged.
opened. ( if equipped )
This message comes when brake fluid level is This message comes on when the tail lamps
low and engine has been running. are ON with the ignition in the "OFF" state.
This message comes when fuel level warning

lamp is ON or Blinking and engine has been This message comes when vehicle has crossed
running. scheduled service limit.

Display Operating Conditions 10.12.3 Tyre Direction Monitoring System (TDMS) Alert
Tyre direction monitoring system or TDMS assists you when vehicle

has just started and you are about to move the vehicle. It tells you
The message will be displayed if you are trying about the current direction in which tyres are aligned at very
to enter into settings in vehicle running state. beginning of manoeuvring the vehicle.
TFT
<Level 5>
This message comes when you are driving

vehicle above 120 kmph. (if equipped)
<Level 3>
This message comes when water is detected
in fuel filter and engine has been running. It is
applicable for diesel variants only.
This message comes when either of driver or

passenger (if occupied) seatbelt is unbuckled.

<Level 0> 2. When vehicle speed is zero and vehicle is in neutral and
clutch is not engaged.
10.12.4 Door Alerts
Back door open Front right door open Left front door open
Operating Conditions
Tyre alignment is displayed in 6 levels (level 0 to level 5) depending

on the alignment degree when the ignition switch is turned to "ON"
position from "OFF" position.
Working Conidtions:
10.12.5 Emission Control Alerts
1. When vehicle speed is zero and parking brake engaged.
Refer Emission control chapter

10.13 Warning / Tell-tale Lamps in the Instrument Cluster – Diesel
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
32
31
11
30
29
12
28 13
27 14
15
26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16

Warning / Tell-tale Lamps in the Instrument Cluster – Petrol
1 2 3 4 5 6 8 9 10
32
31
11
12
28
27 14
15
26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 16

1 Left Turn Indicator 18 Head Lamp High Beam Lamp

2 OBD Check Lamp 19 Seat Belt Warning Lamp
3 Low Engine Oil Pressure Warning Lamp 20 Low Fuel Warning Lamp
4 Door Ajar Warning Lamp 21 High Engine Coolant Temperature Warning Lamp
5 AT Malfunction indicator Lamp* 22 HHC malfunction *
6 Airbag Warning Lamp 23 4WD Low
7 Water-in-Fuel warning Lamp* 24 HDC malfunction *
8 Battery Charging System Warning Lamp 25 Parking Brake ON/Brake Fluid Low Warning Lamp
9 Right Turn Indicator 26 ESP Warning Lamp*
10 ABS Warning Lamp 27 4WD HIGH
11 Check Engine Lamp 28 ESP OFF*
12 Overspeed Alert 29 Glow Plug Indicator*
13 DPF indicator Lamp* 30 REGEN indicator Lamp*
14 Parking Lamp 31 Cruise Control*
15 Immobiliser 32 Tiretronics*
16 Front Fog Lamp Indicator*
17 DEF indicator Lamp* *if equipped

10.14 Warning Lamps in the Instrument Cluster 10.14.3 Low Engine Oil Pressure Warning Lamp
10.14.1 Turn Lamps The low engine oil pressure warning lamp illuminates
when the ignition is switched ON and goes off when
The turn lamp arrows in the instrument cluster flash the engine started. If the lamp remains ON even after
showing the direction indicated by the turn signals. A starting the engine, or illuminates while driving, stop immediately,
sudden increase in the rate of flashing indicates check the oil level after 2-3 minutes. If low, add engine oil to the
failure of one or more of the lamp bulbs. Have them replaced as “MAX” level and check status. If problem persists, contact an
soon as possible. Authorised Mahindra Dealer immediately.
10.14.2 OBD Check Lamp

Operating the vehicle with the low oil pressure warning lamp
The OBD check lamp illuminates when the ignition is ON could cause sudden unexpected engine failure and loss of
switched ON and remains ON till the engine is vehicle control, resulting in an accident and/or serious
started indicating normal status. If the lamp remains personal injury.
ON, even after starting the engine it indicates a potential
malfunction.
There may be a malfunction in: Do not run the engine with low oil pressure warning indicator
ON. This may result in engine damage, which will not be covered
• The fuel management system by the limited warranty.
• The emission control system
• Systems which affect emissions 10.14.4 Door Ajar Warning Lamp
Such malfunctions may result in excessive emissions. Contact an The door ajar warning lamp illuminates when any of
Authorised Mahindra Dealer immediately. the doors excluding hood are open during ignition
ON. The buzzer chimes when the vehicle speed goes

beyond 6 kmph. The lamp and chime goes OFF when all the doors • Illuminates while driving
are closed properly.
Contact an Authorised Mahindra Dealer immediately when the
airbag warning lamp indicates a system malfunction. The airbag
10.14.5 AT Malfunction Indicator Lamp (If equipped) may not deploy when needed, which could result in serious or fatal
injury, or it might deploy unexpectedly or unnecessarily, which may
• This warning lamp comes on when the ignition switch result in personal injury.
! is turned on and it goes off when the engine is
started.
10.14.7 Water-in-Fuel Warning Lamp (if equipped)
• If the lamp stays ON or comes ON while driving, some of the
Transmission control components including sensors and devices The water-in-fuel warning lamp illuminates when the
may be malfunctioning. accumulation of water in the fuel filter reaches the
maximum permissible limit. The fuel filter needs to be
• If the Indicator lamp is blinking continuously, reduce the vehicle
drained. Contact an Authorised Mahindra Dealer.
speed until the lamp stops blinking. Contact the Mahindra dealer
as soon as possible.
Do not continue driving the vehicle with the Water-in-Fuel

10.14.6 Airbag Warning Lamp Warning Lamp ON. This may result in fuel pump / other fuel
system component damage, which will not be covered by the
The airbag warning lamp in the instrument cluster warranty.
illuminates when the ignition is switched ON and goes
off in 6 secs. irrespective of engine condition. If the
lamp remains ON continuously or flash intermittently, contact an 10.14.8 Battery Charging System Warning Lamp
Authorised Mahindra Dealer immediately.
The battery charging system warning lamp
Following conditions indicate airbag malfunction: illuminates when the battery is not being charged or
• Lamp fails to go OFF after engine is started when there is a malfunction in the alternator.
• Lamp does not illuminate at all or Flash intermittently

This lamp illuminates when the ignition is switched ON and goes out 10.14.10 Check Engine Lamp
as soon as the engine is started. If the lamp continues to remain
ON even after starting the engine or while driving, it is an indication The check engine lamp illuminates when the ignition
that the battery is not being charged or there is a malfunction in ENGINE ! is switched ON and goes out in 3 secs. indicating
the alternator. Check the alternator drive belt for looseness/ normal status. The lamp blinks or illuminates
breakage. If the drive belt is okay, switch OFF all unnecessary continuously if there is a fault in the engine management system.
electrical equipment and recheck. Contact an Authorised Mahindra Switch OFF the engine immediately. Contact the nearest Authorised
Dealer for further assistance. Mahindra Dealer for necessary repairs.
10.14.9 Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Malfunction 10.14.11 Overspeed Alert (If equipped)
Lamp
Overspeed warning lamp will start blinking when
The ABS malfunction lamp illuminates when the vehicle speed is above 120kmph. When speed starts
ignition is switched ON and goes OFF after about 3 to decrease, lamp will keep blinking till 114 kmph.
secs. If the ABS malfunction lamp continues to
remain ON or illuminates while driving (and the brake system
warning lamp is OFF), ABS will not operate. But the brake system
10.14.12 DPF Indicator Lamp (If equipped)
will still operate conventionally. In this condition, the wheels can lock
If the DPF indicator is ON in the engine running
during severe braking. Have the vehicle checked by an Authorised
condition then DPF regeneration has not happened.
Mahindra Dealer as soon as possible.
Follow the instructions mentioned in the “EMISSION
However, if ABS malfunction lamp and brake fluid low warning lamp CONTROL SYSTEM”.
are simultaneously glowing, there is a severe malfunction in the
ABS. Operate the vehicle with extreme care and have the vehicle 10.14.13 Park Lamp
checked as soon as possible at an Authorised Mahindra Dealer.
The Park lamp indicator illuminates whenever park
lamp is switched ON through Combination switch.

10.14.14 Immobiliser 10.14.17 Front Fog Lamp (if equipped)

B l i n k i n g i n I G N O N : Vehicle has been turned on using The front fog lamp telltale indicates the status of the
an invalid key. front fog lamp. The front fog lamp can be switched
ON only when the parking lamp is ON.
If it is continuously ON in IGN ON condition or it is blinking fast in IGN
OFF, it indicates malfunction in immobilizer system. Contact
authorized Mahindra dealer for assistance. 10.14.18 Seat Belt Warning Lamp
The seat belt warning lamp illuminates and the

10.14.15 DEF Indicator Lamp (If equipped) buzzer chimes, reminding the driver to fasten the
seat belt when the ignition is ON and vehicle running
If the DEF indicator is ON in the engine running condition. The lamp will continue to illuminate till the driver fastens
condition then DEF Level is low or incorrect DEF has the seat belt properly.
been filled or DEF Dosing is malfunctioning. Follow the
instructions mentioned in the ‘EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM’. For the co-driver lamp will be centre console.
10.14.16 Head Lamp / High Beam Lamp 10.14.19 Low Fuel Warning Lamp
The head lamp high beam telltale illuminates When the fuel level in the fuel tank falls below the
whenever the head lamps are switched ON to high reserve limit, the low fuel warning lamp is illuminated.
beam or when the head lamp flash is used. Refuel sufficiently and the lamp turns OFF. If the lamp
continues to remain ON even after refuelling, contact an Authorised
Mahindra Dealer.

10.14.20 High Engine Coolant Temperature Warning 10.14.23 HDC Malfunction (if equipped)
Lamp
Hill Descent Control or HDC malfunction warning
The high engine coolant temperature warning lamp lamp indicates malfunction in HDC system. Contact
will blink if gauge is showing 7 bar. it will be nearest authorised Mahindra Dealer.
continuously ON if gauge is showing 8 bar. it
represents that engine is overheating.
10.14.24 Parking Brake Lamp
The lamp illuminates when Parking brake is engaged

Do not continue driving the vehicle with an overheated engine. or when brake fluid level is low .If the lamp illuminates
This may result in engine damage, which will not be covered by while driving, do the following:
the limited warranty.
• Check if the parking brake is engaged. If yes, disengage it
10.14.21 HHC malfunction (If equipped) • Check if brake fluid level is low. If yes, top-up brake fluid to the
required level
HHC malfunction lamp turn ON if there is any • There is some concern in EBD. Please Contact Authorised
malfunction in hill hold control system of the vehicle. Mahindra Dealer
10.14.22 4WD Low Clean the top of the brake fluid reservoir before removing the
cap. Make sure no dirt, impurities or other items fall into the
4WD This lamp indicates that the vehicle is running in the reservoir. Do not leave the cap off for more than a few minutes.
LOW 4WD low gear. Driving in this mode gives maximum Any contaminants, impurities or moisture in the brake fluid can
traction while driving on all adverse conditions. affect brake operation, resulting in an accident.

10.14.25 ESP System Warning Lamp (If equipped)

If the brake warning lamp comes ON while driving, the brake While driving, if the ESP system warning lamp blinks,
system might not be working properly. The pedal might be it indicates that ESP has taken control of the vehicle
harder to operate or might go closer to the floor and it can stability. If the lamp remains ON, it indicates the
take longer to stop. Pull off the road carefully and stop the malfunction in the ESP System. Contact the nearest Authorised
vehicle. Have the vehicle towed to the nearest Authorised Mahindra Dealer.
Mahindra Dealer for checks or repairs.
10.14.26 4WD High
Driving the vehicle with the brake fluid low warning lamp ON or This lamp indicates that the vehicle is driven in the
when you suspect brake trouble is very dangerous and could 4WD high gear. Driving in this mode gives more
result in serious fatalities. Have your vehicle towed to an traction while driving on cross-country roads .
10.14.27 ESP OFF Lamp (If equipped)
The lbrake fluid warning lamp may flash momentarily during The ESP OFF lamp illuminates when the ESP has
sharp cornering maneuvers, which change fluid level conditions. been switched OFF manually.
The vehicle should have service performed, and the brake fluid
level checked
.
If brake / clutch failure is detected, immediate repair is necessary

10.14.28 Glow Plug Indicator (If equipped) When SET+ button in the steering wheel is pressed, cruise control
is activated and the lamp illuminates indicating the vehicle is in
Glow plug indicator illuminates when the ignition is cruise mode.
turned ON and Glow plug is activated. It automatically
goes OFF when the glow plug reaches the required When CRUISE OFF button in the steering wheel is pressed for more
temperature. Contact an authorized Mahindra dealer, if it than 3 seconds, the cruise mode is deactivated and the lamp goes
illuminates while driving. OFF indicating that the vehicle is not in cruise mode.
If the lamp does not illuminate when the vehicle is in cruise mode or
10.14.29 Regen Indicator Lamp (If equipped) does not go OFF when the vehicle is out of cruise mode, there is a
possible malfunction in the lamp or the cruise control system. Have
if it is continuously ON, It indicates the DPF Manual the vehicle checked by an Authorised Mahindra Dealer.
Regeneration is required. It will blink when Manual
regeneration is in progress. Follow the instructions mentioned in
10.14.31 Tiretronics
the ‘EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM’.
The Tiretronics lamp illuminates if there is a tyre
10.14.30 Cruise Indicator pressure or temperature difference in one of the
tyres. The Tiretronics lamp blinks (for approx. 90
The cruise control lamp illuminates when the ignition secs.) and then illuminates continuously when there is a malfunction
is switched ON and goes off in about 3 secs. in the Tiretronics.
indicating normal status.

REVERSE PARKING ASSIST SYSTEM (RPAS)
11 REVERSE PARKING ASSIST SYSTEM (RPAS) 11.1 RPAS Sensors
Reverse parking assistance system is provided to aid the driver Two RPAS sensors are located at the rear bumper to assist driver
while parking the vehicle in reverse at a speed of less than 5kmph. for hassle-free parking.
While reversing, RPAS will detect the obstacles at the rear side of
the vehicle within the sensing zone, which cannot be viewed through
the internal rear view mirror and the outside rear view mirrors.
The RPAS will then alert the driver by sending out sound alarms at
different frequency to indicate proximity of the obstacle from the
vehicle.
The alert sound level is proportional to the distance.
Lesser the distance, shorter the interval between beeps. W52R01
Magnetic devices present in the detection range could vastly

affect the sensor performance and the distance displayed may
not be accurate.
Always keep the sensors clean and free from ice formation,
dust, water etc. for proper working of the system.
Do not press or apply shock on the sensors by hitting or using a
high-pressure water gun while washing. The sensors could be
damaged.

REV ERSE PARKING A SSIST SYST EM (RPAS)
11.2 Driving and Operation 11.3 RPAS Information on Instrument Cluster
60 cm
• RPAS is an aiding system. Under no circumstances
mahindra will accept any responsibility or can be held liable
for any direct or indirect, incidental or consequential damage
caused by this system
• System will not sense pot holes, trenches or drainages
which are below the ground level
• Applying paint over the sensor will affect the performance of
the system RPAS display on the instrument cluster gives the following
Activation & De-activation of RPAS information:
• The vehicle should be in I G N O N state to activate the reverse • Left zone indicates obstacle on left side
parking assistance system • Right zone indicates obstacle on right side
• RPAS will be activated automatically when reverse gear is
engaged and deactivate when reverse gear is disengaged
• When the obstacles come in the sensing range, the systems
starts giving the indication based on the distance and direction
of the obstacles as defined in the detecting zones. The closer the
obstacles, more display bars illuminate & frequency of beeps
increases.

11.4 Operation of RPAS

1. Start the vehicle (IGN is turned ON)
2. Change the gear to reverse (engage the reverse gear). The
RPAS will be displayed as like below in the Instrument cluster.
5. The Beep sound can be heard from the Instrument cluster.

Frequency of the beep will increase if obstacle comes closer
(crossing each display bar) and the sound will be continuous if
any of the obstacle is less than 50 cm.
6. The RPAS distance displayed will be the minimum of distances
sensed by left and right sensors. And 120 cm is the maximum
3. Start moving the vehicle in the reverse direction detection range.
4. Display bars in the respective direction will glow according to
obstacles in its path

For Example: 11.5 Pay Attention

Assume 2 obstacles are placed as mentioned below: 1. If display bars in any one of the sides are displayed with cross
• Obstacle at left at 70 cm marks, contact an Authorised Mahindra Dealer
• Obstacle at right at 101 cm

On engaging the gear in reverse, instrument cluster will display as
below:
70 cm
2. If all display bars are displayed with cross marks, contact an

Since obstacle is at 70 cm in left - minimum distance is shown in

the distance indicator.
Along with this beep sound can be heard from Instrument cluster.
Frequency of the beep will increase if obstacle comes closer and
the sound will be continuous if any of the obstacles is less than 50
cm.

3. Obstacle in the blind zone cannot be sensed by the system. 5. Point B will be detected sooner or later, but A may not be
detected at all.
W52R02
W52R04
4. Please check the condition of the obstacle behind your vehicle
before reversing. In some cases, the display may be not as 6. Not all obstacles are detected from 120 cm. For instance, a
same as reality due to the installed sensor level, obstacle person is detected from 75 cm because of the weak reflection
shape and reflection condition. or absorption of the waves of the clothes.
W52R03 W52R05

7. The distance indication may move up and down due to different 9. The obstacle of a conical shape may not be detected, since the
sizes of the obstacle at different positions. ultrasonic waves get deflected away.
W52R06
Blind Zone Obstacle Sensing Zone
8. Though the obstacle is in the sensing zone, obstacle may not

be detected since the ultrasonic waves are not reflected back
to the sensor.
Obstacle
Blind Zone Sensing Zone

W52R07

11.6 Limitations of RPAS – Tall or curved curb

– Low obstacles (with height of 40 cm above ground level)
• System may not sense obstacles like wire mesh, handrail, small
objects which are below the bumper level – Tall obstacles with upper sections projecting outwards in the
direction of the vehicle
• System may not sense obstacles with cotton or spongy surface,
which will absorb ultrasonic waves emitted by RPAS • Depending upon the shape of the obstacle and other
environmental factors, the detection distance may shorten or
• System performance is dependent on the reflection angle of the
detection may be impossible
obstacle
• Obstacles may not be detected if they are too close to the
• System may give false alert without obstacles while reversing the
sensor
vehicle on grasslands, gravels and bumpy roads considering it to
be an obstacle • Thin posts or objects lower than the sensor may not be detected
when approached, even if they have been detected once
• System may alert you by sensing the ground when the bumper is
not fitted in its intended position or when the vehicle is • Because of other ultrasonic sources, sensor may give false
overloaded alarm for e. g., sweeping machines, high pressure steam
cleaners and neon lights
• System may give false signal while the vehicle moves from plain
ground to a slope terrain and vice versa • Due to vehicle horns, motorcycle engines, air brakes of large
vehicles, or other loud noises producing ultrasonic waves, the
• System may give false signal by sensing the ground when the
vicinity of the vehicle is noisy. It may cause sensor to give false
bumper is tilted more from the normal position or when the
alarm
vehicle is heavily overloaded
• System may give false signal an alarm during heavy rain, snow
and heavy wind conditions
• The shape of the obstacle may prevent a sensor from detecting
it. Some obstacles for example as follows:
– Sharply-angled objects

STEERING AND BRAKES
12 STEERING AND BRAKES When driving in rough/off roads, hold the steering wheel rim,
do not hold the wheel spokes. A sudden bump can jerk/ turn
12.1 Steering the wheel and injure your hand. This may also lead to loss of
vehicle control.
Your vehicle is equipped with power steering. Power steering uses
energy from the engine to decrease the driver's effort in steering
the vehicle. The power steering system will give you good vehicle Keep both hands on the steering wheel, with the thumbs
response and increased ease of maneuverability in tight spaces. If resting on the outer wheel rim.
for some reason the power assist is interrupted, it will provide
mechanical steering capability to steer the vehicle. Under these To help prevent damage to the power steering pump:
conditions, you will observe a substantial increase in steering effort,
especially at very low vehicle speeds and during parking maneuvers. • Never hold the steering wheel to the extreme right or the
extreme left for more than a few seconds when the engine is
running
• Heavy or uneven steering efforts may be caused by low power
Upon initial start-up in cold weather, the power steering pump steering pump fluid level. Check the low power steering pump
may produce noise for a short amount of time. This is due to fluid level before seeking service from an Authorized Mahindra
the cold, thick fluid in the steering system. This noise should be Dealer
considered normal, and it does not in any way damage the
steering system. • Do not fill the power steering pump reservoir above the MAX
mark on the reservoir, this may result in leaks from the reservoir
Continued operation with reduced power steering performance

could pose a safety risk to yourself and others. Have the vehicle If the power steering system breaks down (or if the engine is
serviced at specified intervals or whenever a power steering turned OFF), you can still steer the vehicle manually, but it takes
problem is noticed. more effort.

STEERING AND BRAKES
If the steering wanders or pulls, check for: To tilt/adjust the steering wheel;
• Under inflated tire(s) on any wheel(s)
• Uneven vehicle loading
• High crown in the center of the road
• High crosswinds
• Wheels out of alignment
• Wheels out of balance
• Loose or worn suspension components
1. Ensure the vehicle is stationary and parking brake engaged
12.2 Tilt Steering 2. Push the steering tilt lever down to unlock
3. Raise or lower the steering wheel to the desired position
4. Pull the steering tilt lever back up to its original position to lock
the steering
5. Adjust the seat according to the steering wheel position
An improperly locked steering wheel could cause loss of control

and lead to accidents. Never adjust the steering wheel while
driving.
The steering wheel can be adjusted as required using the lever in

the steering shroud under the steering wheel.

STEERING AND BRAKES
12.3 Steering Controls - Audio Control System (if

equipped)
C A
Audio control through the steering wheel switches/buttons helps
the driver to operate the audio system from the steering wheel
without losing concentration. The system has four switches which D
are mounted on the steering wheel. Hold the Mute button to start B
the infotainment system.
W12I04
A Source C Mute
Seek/Call Receive
B D Volume (+) & Volume (-)
/Disconnect
Source
A/C
0
1 2
3
4
The source button switches between different modes in the audio
system.
When the source button is pressed once, the next source is chosen
in the following sequence, provided the required media is
Refer to the Audio/Infotainment e-Manual for complete connected.
information on audio controls and features. The map
upgradation details are also available in the Infotainment Tuner � MP3 � USB - Auxiliary
manual.
In case of the absence of USB mode, the system will toggle
between Tuner and Auxiliary modes.

STEERING AND BRAKES
Seek/Call Receive/Call Disconnect 12.4 Brakes

Press the SEEK switch once to increase radio reception frequency Your vehicle is equipped with disc brakes in the front and drum
by 0.05 MHz. Press the SEEK switch continuously for more than 3 brakes in the rear.
Sec for AUTO scan of radio stations. In USB modes, the next track
can be selected by pressing the switch once. Disc brakes offer good braking capability and reduced stopping
distance. Wet brake discs result in reduced braking efficiency. After
This button can also be used to receive or disconnect calls while a car wash or driving the vehicle through water, dab the brake
connected through Bluetooth. pedal while driving to remove the film of water from the brake pads.
Mute Brake pads feature wear indicator. When the brake pad is worn,
metallic squeal noise is heard indicating the pad wear. Have them
Press the Mute button to mute the audio. Press again to Un-mute. replaced immediately.
Volume (+) and Volume (—)
To increase the volume by one point press the (+) button once. To Driving with wet brakes is dangerous. Stopping distance
decrease the volume by one point press the (—) button once. increases considerably when braking.
Dry the brakes by driving at very slow speed and applying the
brakes lightly until the brake performance becomes normal.
If the steering wheel audio control switches do not work, you
can still control the system through the infotainment system or
with the remote (if equipped).
Even if the power assist (vacuum assistance) is completely lost,
the brakes will still work. The brake pedal would be much
harder than normal and the vehicle stopping / braking distance
will be longer than usual.

STEERING AND BRAKES
12.4.1 Parking on a Hill/Incline
If you have to park facing uphill, select first gear and turn the front The brake warning lamp indicates only the parking brake status.
wheels away from the kerb. If you have to park facing downhill, It does not indicate the degree of brake application. Be sure the
select reverse gear and turn the front wheels towards the kerb. parking brake is firmly set when parked and the gear shift lever
Always ensure the parking brake is engaged before leaving the is in gear. When parking on a hill you should apply the parking
vehicle. brake before shift lever in gear, since the load on the
transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult to move
the shift lever out of gear.
12.4.2 Parking Brake
Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged before driving off.

Failure to do so can lead to brake problems due to excessive
heating of the rear brakes.
• The parking brake should be adjusted as per recommended
maintenance schedule
• Always apply the parking brake when leaving the vehicle, and
be certain to leave the transmission engaged. Failure to do
so may allow the vehicle to roll and cause damage, hit a
bystander resulting in physical injury.
To apply the parking brake, pull the park brake lever up as firmly as
possible. When the parking brake is applied with the ignition ON, the • Leaving unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a
brake warning lamp in the instrument cluster illuminates. To number of reasons. Children should be warned not to touch
release the parking brake, pull the parking brake lever up slightly, the parking brake or the gear shift lever. Do not leave the key
press the release button on the lever tip and lower the parking in the ignition. A child could accidently move the vehicle
brake lever completely. leading to accidents

STEERING AND BRAKES
• The parking brake should always be applied when the driver The minimum speed for ABS to function is 12 kmph. ABS is
is not in the vehicle. activated only during wheel lock conditions where ABS takes over
and prevents wheel lock. During the ABS operation, a slight
Engaging the parking brake while the vehicle is in motion can cause
pulsation may be felt in the brake pedal to indicate ABS is active.
the rear wheels to lock up. You could lose control of the vehicle and You may also hear motor noise from the engine compartment. It is
cause an accident.
recommended to hold the brake pedal firmly while the ABS is active
rather than pumping the brake pedal or removing foot off the pedal
12.5 Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) in panic..
Depressing the brake pedal on slippery road surfaces as on a
manhole cover, a steel plate at a construction site, a joint in a
bridge, etc. on a rainy day, tends to activate the anti-lock brake
system. The ABS warning lamp lights up when you switch the
ignition ON and turns OFF after a few seconds. If the ABS warning
lamp does not go out or if it comes ON while driving, it means there
is a fault in the ABS system. In both cases, the normal braking
system remains active, exactly as on a vehicle without ABS.
The vehicle should be examined as soon as possible by an
authorized Mahindra dealer. The Anti-lock braking system, It is
designed to shorten the stopping distance: Always drive at a
The Anti-lock Brake System (also called as ABS) is designed to help moderate speed and maintain a safe distance from the vehicle in
prevent lock-up of the wheels and stable stopping of vehicle during a front of you. The stopping distance may be longer in the following
sudden, panic emergency braking or braking on slippery road cases:
surfaces. The ABS system takes input from wheel speed sensors
and brake pedal switch to control the brake fluid pressures at the • Driving on rough, gravel or snow covered roads.
wheels to avoid wheel lock-up. It allows vehicle to be steered during • Driving with tyre chains installed.
braking.
• Driving over steps such as the joints on the road.

STEERING AND BRAKES
• Driving on roads where the road surface is pitted or differences 12.6 Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD) (if
in surface height. equipped)
The ABS warning lamp lights up when you switch ON
the ignition and should turn OFF after a few seconds. EBD, as a subsystem of the ABS system, controls the effective
If the ABS warning lamp does not turn OFF or if it adhesion utilisation of the rear wheels. EBD aids in distributing the
turns ON while driving, it means there is a fault in the ABS system. brake forces more evenly leading to better vehicle stability during
In both cases, the normal braking system remains active, exactly as braking.
on a vehicle without ABS. The vehicle should be examined as soon Typically, the front end carries more weight and EBD distributes
as possible by an authorized Mahindra dealer. less braking pressure to the rear brakes avoiding a lock up/skid.
For example, under light loads EBD applies less effort to the rear
brakes and for heavy loads it allows full braking effort to the rear
Do not overestimate the Anti-lock Brake System: Although the wheels.
Anti-lock Brake System assists in providing vehicle control, it is
still important to drive with all due care and maintain a A fault with EBD is indicated by illumination of the brake as well as
moderate speed and safe distance from the vehicle in front of ABS warning lamps. The vehicle should be examined as soon as
you. There are limits to the vehicle stability and effectiveness of possible by an Authorised Mahindra Dealer.
steering wheel operation even with ABS active. If tyre grip
performance exceeds its capability, or if hydroplaning occurs Warning Lamp/Tell
during high speed driving in the rain or water logged roads, the Symbol Action/Remarks
Tale
Anti-lock Brake System will not assist with vehicle control.
Both ABS and Parking

EBD Malfunction brake Telltale lamp will
Telltale be ON incase of EBD
malfunction.

HEATING, VENTILATION AND AIR-CONDITIONING SYSTEM (HVAC) (If equipped)
13 HEATING, VENTILATION AND AIR- ethereal or faint sweetish odor. Exposure of refrigerant to the
CONDITIONING SYSTEM (HVAC) (If equipped) skin or eyes may cause irritation and frostbite. It can also cause
suffocation, dizziness and loss of concentration. When mixed
The climate control system enables you to set the cabin at the with compressed air or certain other refrigerants, it may form
desired comfortable condition by controlling airflow, air intake and a flammable mixture. Never try to service the HVAC system
temperature control. The HVAC system also helps in defrosting and yourself which would involve refrigerant handling.
defogging/de-misting the windshield and windows.
Engine coolant is utilized to heat the cabin air. For cooling cabin air,
an air conditioning circuit based on the vapor compression - If you sleep while operating the air conditioner or heater with
refrigeration cycle is used. The air conditioning system uses a all the windows closed, You may suffocate to death due to lack
refrigerant along with a suitable lubricating oil. Although being non- of ventilation. When you operate the air conditioner or heater,
ozone depleting, the refrigerant is a greenhouse gas, hence once ventilate frequently.
allowed to escape in the atmosphere, it adversely affects the
environment by contributing to global warming/climate change.
Multiple vents are provided for distributing the air, being force To ensure sufficient air flow and hence adequate HVAC system
circulated by the HVAC blower, throughout the passenger performance, the air flow path should be kept free of
compartment. Various ducts supply air from the HVAC unit to these obstructions. Keep the system’s air intake, located near the
vents having adjustable louvers. plenum appliqué, free of snow, leaves and other debris. Also
keep the area in front of the air vents free of any obstruction
inside the cabin.
Refrigerant used in the system is a hazardous liquefied gas and

is under high pressure. The refrigerant is colorless and has

HEATING, VENTILATIO N AND AIR-CONDITIONING SYSTEM (HVAC) (If equipped)
13.1 HVAC Overview
A B B A
C D C
1 2
3
0 4
A/C
F
E E

13.2 Center/Side Vents Side Vents
Center/Side Vents There are two side vents located one each at the left and right
extreme ends of the instrument panel.
Two center vents are located below the audio system on the
instrument panel. Both the center and side vents provide air flow to Rotate the knob ( A) clock wise to shut off the air flow and anticlock
the front and rear seat passengers. Rotate the knob ( A) clock wise wise to allow the air flow through the air vent. Direct air to the
to shut off the air flow and anticlock wise to allow the air flow desired direction by the adjusting knob (A).
through the air vent. Direct air to the desired direction by the
adjusting knob (A).
W52K12
1 2
3
0
W52K11
4
A/C

13.3 HVAC Controls (if equipped)
A B C D
1 2
3
0 4
1 2
3
0 4 A/C
A/C
W52K15
E F G
W52K14
• Face Mode — air is discharged from the center vents and side
vents. This mode is most suitable for directing air flow towards
the face of the passengers
A Temperature Control Knob E AC ON/OFF
B Air Distribution Control Switch F Air Re-circulation Switch
• Face-Foot Mode — air is discharged from the center vents, side
vents and foot vents. This mode is most suitable for directing air
C Front Demist/Defrost G Rear Demist flow towards both the face and feet of passengers at the same
D Blower Speed Control Knob time
• Foot Mode — air is discharged from the two foot vents. This
mode is most suitable for directing air flow towards the feet of
13.3.1 Air Distribution Control Switch passengers seated on front seats
The air flowing out of various vents can be controlled by the air • Foot-Defrost Mode — air is discharged from the foot vents, side
distribution control Switch. defrost vents and windshield defrost vents. This mode is most
suitable for directing air flow towards the feet of passengers
Following are the five different distribution modes to choose from: while defrosting or de-misting/defogging. Keep the air intake
knob in fresh air mode

• Defrost Mode — air is discharged from the side defrost vents 13.3.3 Temperature Control Knob
and windshield defrost vents. This mode is most suitable for
directing air flow towards the front windshield to ensure
defrosting or de-misting / defogging. Keep the air intake knob in
fresh air mode
13.3.2 Blower Speed Control Knob 1 2

3
0 4
A/C
1 2
3
0
W52K17
1 2
3
0 4 By operating the temperature control knob, temperature of air
A/C
being discharged from various vents can be adjusted to the desired
level. Engine coolant is utilized to heat, whereas the air conditioner
is used to cool the air inside the AC unit. Based upon selected
position of the temperature control dial, the desired discharged air
W52K16 temperature can be obtained.
The blower force-circulates air through the HVAC unit and By rotating the dial counter-clockwise and setting it to the extreme
distributes it throughout the passenger compartment. left position, maximum cooling is obtained. When the dial is rotated
clockwise, the discharged air progressively starts getting warmer
Blower is off when the blower speed control knob is set tol “0” and at the extreme right position, hot air is discharged.
position (extreme left). To switch-on the blower, rotate the control
knob clockwise which progressively increases the blower speed.

13.3.4 Air Intake Mode Control In this mode, the air from inside the passenger compartment will be
sucked by the blower and utilized further to ventilate/cool/ heat
The air intake control button toggles between fresh air or the cabin.
recirculated air modes.
For quick cabin cooling/heating or while driving through dusty/
polluted regions, the recirculation mode should be selected. Driving
with this mode active may lead to better fuel economy and longer
HVAC filter life.
However, running the air conditioner in the re-circulation mode for
2
1 3 long will makes the cabin air too dry and the oxygen level drops
0 4
inside cabin turning the air stale. On the contrary, keeping air intake
A/C control in the recirculation mode for long, with the air conditioner
switched OFF, will make the cabin air too humid and the windshield/
windows are more likely to fog on the inner side.
W52K18
Fresh Air Mode (Outside Air Mode)

At every ignition cycle, The re-circulation mode stays active by
To set the HVAC system to fresh air mode, keep the air intake default.
control switch in the OFF condition. The lamp on this switch is OFF,
indicating that the fresh air mode is active. In this mode, fresh air 13.3.5 Air-Conditioner ON
from outside the vehicle is sucked by the blower and utilized further
to ventilate/cool/ heat the cabin. The air conditioning system can be switched ON/OFF by the “AC
Re-circulation Mode (Re-circulated Air Mode) BUTTON” in the climate control system. An LED is also incorporated
on the button to indicate it’s status. The air conditioner gets
To set the HVAC system to re-circulation mode, press the air intake operational only when both the engine and blower are running.
control switch once. The lamp on the switch is turns ON, indicating
that re-circulation mode is active. When the air conditioner is ON, air gets cooled and de-humidified
before being circulated inside the cabin. In hot weather conditions, it

will take slightly longer to cool the interior as compared to cooler

weather. Fuel consumption will be relatively higher if the vehicle is
being driven with the air conditioner. • In certain operating conditions when the engine gets
overheated, the engine management system may switch off
the air conditioner intermittently
• Occasionally the air conditioner might not function for a few
seconds even when LED on the AC switch remains
A/C illuminated. This is to be considered as normal AC system
2
1 3 operation
0 4
• During extreme cold weather conditions, the air conditioner
A/C
may not function until the temperature of the air near the
evaporator rises above a pre-defined threshold
W52K20 • When the air conditioner is ON, moisture is extracted from
the air. The resulting condensate is drained off from the
The following steps outline the procedure to switch ON the AC ‘ON’. vehicle. It is therefore normal, if you see a small pool of water
under your vehicle
1. Keep windows open/rolled down (carefully during rainy
season) • The air conditioner should be operated at least for ten
minutes once every fortnight, even during winter months.
2. Adjust the blower speed as required
This allows the AC system components to get lubricated
3. Select the air distribution mode as desired periodically and ensures optimum system performance
4. Select the air re-circulation mode if required
5. Press the AC button to turn on the AC
6. Adjust the temperature control dial as per the temperature Your vehicle is equipped with an HVAC filter. If the AC
requirement performance is considerably low, it is recommended to have
the HVAC filter checked at the nearest Mahindra Dealer.

13.4 Defogging/De-misting and Defrosting
For keeping the front windshield and side windows clear, proper To defrost the outside windshield, follow the above steps but
control on the HVAC system is essential. switch OFF the AC.
On Hot and Humid days, do not blow cold air on the windshield
13.4.1 Front Windshield Defogging and side window glass, the difference between the outside and
inside cabin temperature could make the fogging worse.
13.4.2 Rear Windshield Defogging/De-misting (If

equipped)
1 2
3
0 4
A/C
1 2
3
0
W52K29 4
A/C
1. Set the blower to full speed
2. Switch the air conditioner ON
3. Set the air distribution control to defrost mode W52K28
4. Select the fresh (outside) air intake mode
Press the switch once to activate the defogger. The lamp on the
5. Adjust the temperature control knob to maintain comfort switch illuminates upon activation and the defogger heats the rear
windshield clearing the fog.

Switch OFF the defogger by pressing the switch once as soon as A Air Distribution Control D AC ON/OFF
the fog is cleared.
B Blower Speed Control E AC ECO Mode
If you want to switch the defogger ON again, press the defogger
switch again. Air Re-circulation
C Temperature Control F
Switch
On second and subsequent activations of the rear windshield
defogger in the same ignition cycle, the defogger ON time will be
half the duration of the first activation.
Non HVAC variants will be with dummy switches.
13.5 Manual – HVAC Controls (if equipped)
13.5.1 Air Distribution Control
A B C The air flowing out of various vents can be controlled by the air
distribution control knob/button.
Following are the five different distribution modes to choose from:
A/C A/C ECO
D E F
W52K21
A/C A/C ECO
W52K22

• Face Mode — air is discharged from the center vents and side 13.5.2 Blower Speed Control
vents. This mode is most suitable for directing air flow towards
the face of the passengers (suitable in hot weather conditions
with Air Conditioning - 'ON').
• Face-Foot Mode — air is discharged from the center vents, side
vents and foot vents. This mode is most suitable for directing air
flow towards both the face and feet of passengers at the same
time A/C A/C ECO
• Foot Mode — air is discharged from the two foot vents. This
mode is most suitable for directing air flow towards the feet of W52K24
passengers are seated on front seats (suitable in cold weather
conditions with heater 'ON') The blower force-circulates air through the HVAC unit and
• Foot-Defrost Mode — air is discharged from the foot vents, side distributes it throughout the passenger compartment.
defrost vents and windshield defrost vents. This mode is most Blower is off when the blower speed control knob is set to small “o”
suitable for directing air flow towards the feet of passengers position (extreme left). To switch-on the blower, rotate the control
while defrosting or de-misting/defogging. Keep the air intake knob clockwise which progressively increases the blower speed.
knob in fresh air mode (suitable in cold weather conditions with
heater 'ON')
• Defrost Mode — air is discharged from the side defrost vents
and windshield defrost vents. This mode is most suitable for
directing air flow towards the front windshield to ensure
defrosting or de-misting / defogging. Keep the air intake knob in
fresh air mode (suitable in cold weather conditions with heater
'ON')

13.5.3 Temperature Control 13.5.4 Air Intake Mode Control
The air intake control button toggles between fresh air or

recirculated air modes.
A/C A/C ECO
W52K23 A/C A/C ECO
By operating the temperature control knob, temperature of air W52K27

being discharged from various vents can be adjusted to the desired
level. Engine coolant is utilized to heat, whereas the air conditioner Fresh Air Mode (Outside Air Mode )
is used to cool the air inside the AC unit. Based upon selected
position of the temperature control dial, the desired discharged air To set the HVAC system to fresh air mode, keep the air intake
temperature can be obtained. control switch in the OFF condition. The lamp on this switch is OFF,
indicating that the fresh air mode is active. In this mode, fresh air
By rotating the dial counter-clockwise and setting it to the extreme from outside the vehicle is sucked by the blower and utilized further
left position, maximum cooling is obtained. When the dial is rotated to ventilate/cool/ heat the cabin.
clockwise, the discharged air progressively starts getting warmer
and at the extreme right position, hot air is discharged.

Re-circulation Mode (Re-circulated Air Mode) 13.5.5 Air-Conditioner ON

To set the HVAC system to re-circulation mode, press the air intake The air conditioning system can be switched ON/OFF by the “AC
control switch once. The lamp on the switch turns ON, indicating BUTTON” in the climate control system. An LED is also incorporated
that re-circulation mode is active. on the button to indicates the status. The air conditioner is
operational only when both the engine and blower are running.
In this mode, the air from inside the passenger compartment will be
sucked by the blower and utilized further to ventilate/cool/ heat When the air conditioner is ON, air gets cooled and de-humidified
the cabin. before being circulated inside the cabin. In hot weather conditions, it
will take slightly longer to cool the interior as compared to cooler
For quick cabin cooling/heating or while driving through dusty/
polluted regions, the recirculation mode should be selected. Driving weather. Fuel consumption will be relatively higher if the vehicle is
being driven with the air conditioner.
with this mode active may lead to better fuel economy and longer
HVAC filter life.
However, running the air conditioner in the re-circulation mode for
long will makes the cabin air too dry and the oxygen level drops
inside cabin turning the air stale. On the contrary, keeping air intake
control in the recirculation mode for long, with the air conditioner
switched OFF, will make the cabin air too humid and the windshield/ A/C A/C ECO
windows are more likely to fog from the inside.
W52K26
At every ignition cycle, the Re-circulation mode stays active by The following steps outline the procedure to switch the AC ‘ON’
default.
1. Keep windows open/rolled down (carefully during rainy
season)
2. Adjust the blower speed as required
3. Select the air distribution mode as desired

4. Select the air re-circulation mode if required

5. Press the AC button to turn on the AC
Your vehicle is equipped with an HVAC filter. If the AC
6. Adjust the temperature control dial as per the temperature performance is considerably low, it is recommended have the
requirement HVAC filter checked at the nearest Mahindra Dealer.
13.6 HVAC Air Filter (Cabin Air Filter)

• In certain operating conditions when the engine gets
overheated, the engine management system may switch off
the air conditioner intermittently
• Occasionally the air conditioner might not actually be
functioning for a few seconds even when the LED on the AC UP
switch remains illuminated. This is to be considered as
normal AC system operation
• During extreme cold weather conditions, the air conditioner
may not function until the temperature of the air near the
evaporator rises above a pre-defined threshold
• When the air conditioner is ON, moisture is extracted from Your vehicle’s HVAC system is equipped with an air filter at the
the air. The resulting condensate is drained off from the blower inlet just behind the glove box. Air passes through this filter
vehicle. It is therefore normal, if you see a small pool of water element, before getting sucked-in by the blower. Dirt and other
under your vehicle foreign particles get trapped inside the filter. Clean air is then
• The air conditioner should be operated at least for ten circulated through the HVAC unit and into the cabin.
minutes once every fortnight, even during winter months. The HVAC filter gets clogged after prolonged usage/keeping the
This allows the AC system components to get lubricated blower ON with windows rolled down.. The clogged filter will reduce
periodically and ensures optimum system performance the air flow rate, thereby the air-conditioning and heating

efficiencies will be drastically reduced. Even the windshield/ 4. Fully open the vents and adjust louvers to direct air toward
windows may begin to mist/fog-up easily. face
To maintain optimum HVAC system performance, replace the filter 5. Set the air distribution control to face mode
element as per recommended maintenance schedule. However 6. Set air intake control to recirculation mode
while operating in highly dusty or polluting conditions, the filter may 7. Set the temperature control knob to the extreme left (coolest)
require early replacement. If the air flow seems to have position
considerably reduced, get the filter cleaned/replaced immediately.
Once the passenger compartment reaches a comfortable
To access the filter, open the glove box, remove the rubber pins on temperature, the blower speed and temperature control knob can
both sides of the glove box lid. Un-clip the filter retaining clip and be readjusted as desired.
remove the filter straight out. Clean the air filter or [in case of
paper/pollen element. In case of mesh filter (replace if found
damaged)] and follow the reverse procedure for putting the filter
back. If your vehicle was parked in the hot sun with all the windows
closed, drive the vehicle with windows open for the first few
minutes. This will help in venting the hot interior air out and
allow the air conditioner to cool the cabin quickly.
Never operate the HVAC system with the filter removed. This
may result in premature failure of system components.
13.8 Rapid Cabin Heating
13.7 Rapid Cabin Cooling For rapid heating of the cabin, the following AC settings are
recommended:
For rapid cooling of the cabin, the following AC settings are
recommended: 1. Make sure that all the windows are fully closed
1. Make sure that all the windows are fully closed 2. Set the blower to maximum speed
2. Set the blower to maximum speed 3. Set the air distribution control to foot mode
3. Turn the air conditioner ON 4. Set air intake control to recirculation mode

5. Set the temperature control knob to extreme right (hot) 13.9 Defogging/De-misting and Defrosting
position
6. For dehumidified heating, switch the air conditioner ON For keeping the front windshield and side windows clear, proper
control of the HVAC system is essential.
Once the passenger compartment reaches a comfortable
temperature, shift to fresh air mode. Also blower speed and
temperature control knob can be re-adjusted as desired. 13.9.1 Front Windshield Defog
In extreme cold weather conditions, the engine coolant takes

time to get heated up. Hence it might take a while to discharge
hot air.
A/C A/C ECO
W52K30
1. Set the blower to full speed
2. Switch the air conditioner ON
3. Set the air distribution control to defrost mode
4. Select the fresh (outside) air intake mode
5. Adjust the temperature control knob to maintain comfort
To defrost the outside windshield, follow the above steps but

switch OFF the AC.

On hot and humid days, do not blow cold air on the windshield too cold. Shift to any distribution mode other than defrost mode.
and side window glass, the difference between the outside and This will help in keeping windshields and windows clear
inside cabin temperature could make the fogging worse.
• For defogging/de-misting/defrosting the side windows at the
front, select either Face or demist mode while directing air flow
13.9.2 HVAC Points to Remember towards windows by adjusting the louvers of side vents. All other
settings should be kept same as advised for windshield
• For quickly clearing the misted/fogged/frosted-up windshield defogging/de-misting/defrosting
and set air distribution mode to defrost. For quick defrosting, set
• For heating the vehicle interior while windshield defogging/de-
the temperature to extreme hot
misting/defrosting, select the Foot-Defrost mode. All other
• Once the windshield is cleared, keeping the air conditioner ON settings should be kept same as advised for windshield
leads to dehumidified cabin heating/cooling which helps in defogging/de-misting/defrosting
keeping windshields and windows clear. Keep the fresh air mode
• Side window defrosting by keeping the side vent face away from
selected. If required, re-adjust the blower speed and
the side windows and rolling the windows down and up once.
temperature control knob to maintain comfort. The temperature
of air coming out of the vents should neither be too hot nor too • For quickly defogging/de-misting/defrosting the outside of the
cold windshield, it is advisable to operate the windshield wiper/
washer for a few times intermittently
• Driving the vehicle for long with the air conditioner switched off
may lead to windshield or windows getting from the inside. • If snow has deposited on the windshield, use an ice scraper to
remove the ice deposited before using the wiper
• Driving the vehicle for long continuously in the recirculation mode
may lead to windshield or windows getting misted/fogged up • In freezing weather, warm the windshield with the defroster
before using the windshield washer. Also use a washer fluid with
• Do not blow cold air on the windshield and windows for long
anti-freezing properties. This will help prevent the washer fluid
during hot and humid weather. It could make windshield/
from freezing on your windshield
windows mist/fog-up
• A dirty/contaminated windshield would make misting/fogging
• When on a long drive during warm humid/rainy weather, once
worse. Always keep the inside and outside of the windshield
cabin temperature becomes comfortable. Adjust the
clean
temperature knob such that air coming out of the vents is not

• Reduced air flow because of a clogged HVAC filter or any other • Reduced cooling performance from the air conditioner may lead
obstructions in the air flow path may lead to in-adequate to inadequate defogging/de-misting/defrosting. If the cooling
defogging/de-misting/defrosting performance. If the air flow effect seems to have dropped considerably, get the air
seems to have considerably reduced, get the filter replaced conditioning system checked by an Authorized Mahindra Dealer
immediately. The air flow path should be kept free of
obstructions

STARTING AND DRIVING THE VEHICLE
14 STARTING AND DRIVING THE VEHICLE
14.1 Safety Tips - Before Starting your Vehicle Never start your vehicle in a closed garage or in an enclosed
area. Exhaust fumes can be toxic. Always keep the garage door
14.1.1 General open or start the engine in an open area.
• Before starting the vehicle, inspect the inside and outside of the 14.1.2 Mirror Adjustment
vehicle ; look for any damages, leaks, loose parts, foreign
objects/debris. Contact an Authorized Mahindra Dealer if found Ensure that the rear view mirror and both the ORVM’s are adjusted
required. for an unobstructed view of the road behind.
• Before starting your journey, check the working of all safety
devices/components especially brakes, steering, lamps, signals 14.1.3 Exterior Lamps
and tires. In case you suspect any system/devices not working
properly contact Authorized Mahindra Dealer. Have someone observe and confirm normal operation of all exterior
• Adjust the seat head restraint, steering wheel and fasten the lamps while you work on the controls from the driver seat. Also,
seat belt as described in this manual. Never perform any seat/ check functioning of all lamps in the instrument panel.
steering adjustments when the vehicle is in motion.
• Start the vehicle only when seated and belted in the driver's seat. 14.1.4 Door Latches
Check for positive closing, latching, and locking of all doors, both
from inside and outside.
The Engine Management System controls the engine's idle
speed. When the engine starts, idle RPM runs higher than
normal in order to warm the engine. The engine idle speed 14.1.5 Fluid Leaks
RPM reduces once the engine warms up.
Check the area under vehicle after an overnight parking for fuel,
power steering fluid, brake fluid, engine coolant, oil, or other fluid

leaks. If leaks are observed, contact an Authorized Mahindra A C C — The steering is unlocked and can be rotated. In this position
Dealer. all electrical circuits are enabled. Use this mode when you want to
listen to music, etc., with the engine temporarily switched OFF.
14.2 Ignition Switch N o t e : This mode can be used for a short time. It may drain the
battery with prolonged usage.
An illuminator ring is provided on the face of the ignition switch to
help in locating the ignition switch at night. The ring will illuminate O N — All electrical circuits are enabled. Some of the warning or
the moment the driver door is opened and will remain illuminated till information lamps illuminate in this position. While some of the
the driver door is closed. lamps will go out after a few seconds, some will continue to remain
ON till the engine is started. When the vehicle is being driven, the
ignition switch remains in the IGN position.
Select the ignition ON position when the vehicle is being towed.

Do not leave the ignition ON for long when the engine is OFF.
This could lead to battery drain and ignition switch damage.
S T A R T — This position is to start the engine by cranking the starter
motor. This is a momentary position. When the key is turned to the
start position, the starter cranks the engine. Once the engine is
The different positions of the ignition switch are; running, release the key, and the key reverts back to the ON
position and the starter motor disengages from the engine.
L O C K — This is the ignition and steering lock position. The vehicle
circuits and engine are completely switched OFF. The steering
wheel is also locked and the key can be removed from the ignition
only in this position. Do not continue cranking after the engine has started. This will
lead to permanent damages to starter motor and engine
components.

14.3 Pedals
If turning the key is difficult, jiggle the steering wheel from side Manual Transmission (MT) Automatic Transmission (AT)
to side and try again. The key can be removed only in the L O C K
position. When the key is removed, the steering column lock is
activated and the steering wheel cannot be turned.
Never return the key to the L O C K position or try to remove the

key, when the vehicle is in motion. Removing the key may lead to
steering wheel locking. You will lose control of the vehicle and
may cause a serious accident. Remove the key only when the
vehicle is parked. A Accelerator Pedal B Brake Pedal C Clutch Pedal
14.4 Starting the Engine
Make sure all vehicle occupants are properly seated in their seats
and have buckled their safety belts. For more information on seat,
head-restraint positioning, safety belts and their proper usage, refer
to the ‘Seat-Belts’ section in this manual.
Conditions to be met before cranking the engine

• Make sure the gear shift lever is in neutral or clutch is fully
pressed.

• The engine will start even if half turned and the above 10. If the engine fails to start even after repeated attempts as per
condition is met. the procedure given above, contact the nearest Authorized
Mahindra Dealer
• Make sure the parking brake is engaged. Turn the key to IGN
position but do not turn the key to start.
Sequence of activities
If the vehicle battery has discharged, use booster cables, a
1. Apply parking brake. booster battery or a battery from another vehicle to start.
2. Shift the gear shift lever to neutral position. Jump-starting a vehicle can be dangerous if done improperly.
Refer to the ‘Jump-starting procedure’ section in this manual.
3. Turn the ignition ON.
4. Wait till the glow plug lamp to switch off before the engine If the engine still fails to start, contact an Authorized Mahindra
crank. Dealer for assistance.
5. Few warning lamps briefly illuminate. See ‘Warning Lamps in The idle speed is controlled automatically and it will decrease as the
the Instrument Cluster’ section for more information. engine warms up.
6. Do not press the accelerator. Observe the following when the engine is running;
7. Turn the key momentarily to the START position to crank the
• All warning lamps are OFF
engine
8. Once the engine starts, release the key. it will return to the IGN • Low oil pressure lamp is OFF
position After idling for a few seconds, release the parking brake, depress
the clutch, shift the gear shift lever to 1st gear, release the service
brake pedal, drive by releasing the clutch and pressing the
accelerator pedal gradually.
Do not continue cranking after the engine has started. This
will lead to permanent damages to starter motor and
engine components.
9. If the engine fails to start, attempt to restart after about 10
seconds by toggling the ignition

14.4.1 Engine Idling - In Cold Weather • Move the gear shift lever to 1st gear position (reverse gear if
parking on a decline)
Avoid full throttle operation when the engine is cold and prolonged
• Slowly release the service brake pedal
idling at low ambient temperatures. Long periods of idling may be
harmful to your engine. Combustion chamber temperatures can • Lock your vehicle when leaving
drop so low that the fuel may not burn completely. Incomplete
combustion allows carbon and varnish to form on piston rings and
injector nozzles. Also, the unburned fuel can enter the crankcase, 14.6 Manual Transmission
diluting the oil and causing rapid wear to the engine.
14.6.1 Gear Shift Lever
14.5 Stopping the Engine The gear shift lever shifts the transmission into various gears. The
gearshift pattern is shown on the gear lever knob. The clutch pedal
Your vehicle is powered by a turbo diesel/petrol engine. Before should be depressed fully while shifting, and then released slowly.
A/C
turning the engine OFF, always allow the engine to return to normal
idle speed and run for few seconds. This assures proper cooling
and lubrication of the turbocharger. This is particularly necessary
after any hard driving.
To reduce the risk of personal injury, before turning OFF the

engine and leaving the vehicle, always,
• Keep your right foot on the service brake pedal
• Turn front wheels towards the road curb
With the gear shift lever in neutral and brakes released, the vehicle
• Switch OFF the ignition, turn the key to the steering lock position
can move freely by pushing or towing. The engine can be started in
and remove the key
this mode. It is always recommended to keep the brake pedal
• Firmly engage the parking brake depressed in this position. It is advisable to shift into neutral when

the vehicle is at a standstill for longer durations with the engine

idling.
• Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Children could move the gear
shift lever, which could result in an accident or serious injury
Coasting the vehicle with the gear lever in neutral and engine
ON/OFF is not recommended. The steering and braking will be • On slippery/wet road surfaces, never downshift in order to
very hard without power assist while coasting with the engine obtain braking action. This could result in a wheel slip and
OFF. In an event of panic braking, you will not have the power of reduced vehicle control
engine braking to slow down the vehicle. This may lead to F o r w a r d — Use the gears 1 to 6 as per vehicle load, road/traffic
personal injury or accident. conditions or as per requirement.
R e v e r s e — This gear is to enable the vehicle to move in the reverse
direction. Move the gear shift lever into this position only after the
Do not leave the vehicle with the gear shift lever in the neutral vehicle has come to a complete stop.
position. Always engage the manual parking brake before
leaving the vehicle, to prevent any vehicle movement leading to To engage REVERSE gear from the NEUTRAL position, lift the
possible injury to a by-stander or damage to the vehicle. REVERSE ring, located below the knob and move the gear selector
For brief stops, e. g. at traffic lights, keep the gear shift in all the way left and then forward.
neutral and hold the vehicle with the brake pedal. For prolonged
stops, it is recommended to switch OFF the engine and apply
the parking brake. To avoid transmission damage, shift into or out of reverse gear
only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop and the
engine is at idle speed. It is recommended you wait
approximately for three seconds in neutral gear before shifting
into or out of the reverse gear.

Uphill and Downhill Driving Upshifting - Diesel
To prevent the engine from laboring at a low RPM when driving Vehicle Road Speed
Shift Range Engine RPM Range
uphill gradients or with your vehicle heavily loaded, downshift when (kmph)
necessary to maintain engine RPM within the best torque range. 1–2 16
Similarly while driving downhill, downshift to utilize the engine
2–3 27
braking in an optimum manner.
3–4 42 1600–2500
4–5 55
When stopping the vehicle on an uphill gradient, do not hold it 5–6 67
with the clutch/ accelerator; use the brake to avoid
unnecessary clutch wear/heat buildup. When parking on an Down shifting - Diesel
incline, gear alone may not be sufficient to prevent the vehicle
from moving. Always set the parking brake in addition to shifting Vehicle Road Speed
the gear shift lever into gear. It is also recommended to turn (kmph)
the front wheels towards the curb. 6–5 62
5–4 51
14.6.2 Recommended Gear Shifting Speeds 4–3 39 1300–1800
3–2 24
2–1 13
Shift gears at suitable engine or road speeds to safeguard the
transmission components. Avoid driving in high RPM’s (>3000
RPM).
Always depress the clutch fully before moving the gear shift lever
from the current position to any desired position. Perform up-shifts
or down-shifts one gear at a time, do not jump gears.

Upshifting - Petrol 14.7 Automatic Transmission

Vehicle Road Speed The first few shifts on a new vehicle may be somewhat rough. This
(kmph) is a normal phenomenon, and precision shifts will develop within the
1–2 18 initial few hundred kilometers of running.
2–3 30
3–4 42 1600 – 2200 14.7.1 Gear Selector Lever
4–5 55
5–6 70
Downshifting - Petrol P
R
+ N
M
_ D
Vehicle Road Speed
(kmph)
6–5 63
5–4 50
4–3 38 1100 – 1400
3–2 27 Your vehicle is equipped with 6 Speed automatic transmission
2–1 15 having electronic controls with an Adaptive Transmission Control
Strategy. This adaptive Transmission strategy offers optimal
transmission operation and shift quality in different driving
conditions. The transmission electronics are self calibrating.
Therefore, the first few shifts on a new vehicle may be somewhat
rough. This is a normal phenomenon, and precision shifts will
develop within the initial few hundred kms of running.

P : Park position M : Manual Shift 14.7.2 P : Park Position

R : Reverse position M+ : Manual up-shift
N : Neutral position M- : Manual down shift
D : Drive position P
R
+ N
M
_ D
Shift Logic Table
Movement Lock
P-R Yes-Brake pedal + knob button
R-N No
N-D No Use this position to park your vehicle, warm up the engine, or stay in
D-M No a location for an extended length of time.
M-D No To shift in to any other position, first depress the brake pedal, then
D-N No press knob button and move the TGS to R or N or D as desired.
N-R Yes-Only knob button
R-P Yes-Only knob button
• Stop the vehicle completely before shifting into ‘P’
• Never shift to ‘P’ when the vehicle is moving, It will damage
the transmission
• If the lever is shifted to P when the vehicle has not come to
stop and in forward motion, then a ratchet noise will be
heard. This is not abnormal. However we do not recommend
moving to P till the vehicle has come to standstill. As
repeated, such instances can damage the internal parts

• To shift from the “P” position to another position, the ignition 14.7.4 N : Neutral position
switch must be turned to “ON” and the brake pedal should
be depressed. Any forcible attempts to move the selector
lever from “P” without the two procedures may damage the
selector lever
P
R
+ N
14.7.3 R : Reverse position M
_ D
P
R
+ N
M
_ D
At this position, the engine does not transfer power to the wheels
and the vehicle will not move on a flat road. However, for safety,
apply the brake when the gear is in this position.
• Warm up the engine for approximately 3 minutes when the

Use this position to reverse the vehicle ambient temperature is below -15° C. Otherwise, shifting of
gears in Forward or Reverse direction may not be smooth
To shift into 'R' from 'N', completely stop the vehicle, depress the
brake pedal and press the Knob button and to shift from 'N' to 'R'. • Never shift into “N” from the “D” position or vice versa when
the vehicle is moving, or the transmission will be damaged
• If you have to stop on a hill and would like to use this neutral
• Never shift into “R” when the vehicle is moving position, depress the brake pedal firmly
• Please note that the vehicle may slowly move rearward when • Never attempt to move the gear selector lever to “N” when
the selector lever is at “R” the vehicle is in motion

• Do not abruptly drive off or sharply accelerate the vehicle

immediately after shifting into “D” or the transmission will
Depress the brake pedal while shifting the gear lever from “N” get damaged. Wait for D symbol to come in the cluster
to “D” or “R” for your safety. before pressing the accelerator pedal
• Even while the gear is in ‘D’, the vehicle can roll down an
uphill according to the gradients, so you have to depress the
For shifting R to P, press the knob button and for shifting to N brake
or D, only shift lever to moved. Refer the shift logic table for
• Please note that the vehicle may creep forward on level
more clarity.
ground when the selector lever is in “D”; even without
pressing the accelerator pedal and this behavior is known as
14.7.5 D : Drive position forward creep.
N o t e : Equivalent to - clutch release without acceleration in
Manual Transmission)
P
R
14.7.6 M : Manual Shift
+ N
M
_ D
P
R
+ N
M
_ D
Use this position for normal driving conditions. The transmission is

automatically shifted from 1st gear up to 6th gear according to the
level of depression on the accelerator pedal

Driving gear can be adjusted by operating/moving the shift lever in

front or back direction.
• Before leaving the Driver’s seat always make sure that the
In manual shift mode, the user can upshift or downshift from 1 to 6 shift lever is in the P (park) position
or 6 to 1 forward gears by moving the shift lever in front or back
direction. • Shifting into P position while the vehicle is in motion will
cause the drive wheels to lock which will cause you to lose
S h i f t u p : Move the shift lever forward towards + direction and control of the vehicle
release once to shift up one gear.
• Always fully depress the brake pedal before and while
S h i f t D o w n : Move the shift lever backwards towards - direction and shifting out of the Drive (D) position into another position
release once to shift up one gear. (other than M Mode) to avoid inadvertent motion of the
vehicle
The gears can be shifted without requiring to release the
Accelerator pedal. • The shift from D to M (Manual Mode) and M to D can be
performed while the vehicle is moving
In manual mode, downshifts are made automatically when the
vehicle slows down. • To maintain the required levels of vehicle performance and
safety, the system may not execute certain gearshifts when
Auto upshift at Manual Mode is deactivated for only 1st to 2nd & the shift lever is operated
2nd to 3rd gears. Whereas 3rd to 4th , 4th to 5th & 5th to 6th
gears auto upshift will happen at max threshold.
When starting to drive on a snow or icy road, upshift of the gear to
2nd or 3rd is possible to avoid loss of traction.
For safety reason maximum three shifts “+”/ ”-” can be allowed at
given point of time.

Use of Engine Brake 14.7.8 Gear Shift Interlock system

To use the engine as a brake, change into the manual gear shift
mode first, then operate the gear lever to next lower gear.
SHIFT LOCK
P
R
+ N
• Abruptly downshifting and using the engine brake may make M
_D
the vehicle unstable, especially when driving on roads
covered with snow or ice
14.7.7 Ignition Key Interlock system (If equipped)

The Ignition Key cannot be removed from the key barrel unless the The Automatic Transmission has a shift lock system which prevents
shift lever is in the P (Park) position. shifting the transmission from P or N into R unless the Brake Pedal
is depressed
• If the key is stuck in the key barrel due to any electric
malfunction, press the Emergency Key release Switch located to In case of malfunction of the shift lock system, remove the shift lock
the left of the driver foot-well lamp to release the key. Contact cap present on shifter bezel and then press the button inside with
Authorised Mahindra Service Center at the earliest. help of any circular/pen type object , and then press knob button to
come out of P.
• Always start the engine while the selector lever is in P & N with
Brake pedal depressed.
• During operation of key interlock system click noise will be

audible, which is normal

14.7.9 Starting and Driving Off
• Always start the engine while the selector lever is in “P”. For your • For your safety, always depress the brake pedal before
safety, avoid starting the engine from “N” even though you can moving the gear selector lever with the vehicle stopped
do so.
• Never depress the accelerator pedal when moving the gear
• Check whether or not the engine idling speed is normal. Keep selector
the brake pedal depressed and shift into “D” or“R”.
• If you have to stop on a hill, depress the brake pedal securely
• To move the vehicle, release the brake pedal and depress the
accelerator pedal gradually. • When the parking brake is released while the engine is
running at a high rpm, your vehicle may abruptly move.
Therefore, wait until the engine speed returns to idling.
• To avoid any mechanical damages or accidents, never shift
• Do not abruptly drive off or sharply accelerate the engine into “P” or “N” while the vehicle is in motion
after shifting into “D”. Otherwise the transmission will be
damaged. Especially, when you start off after stopping, wait • When driving at a high speed, any sudden attempt to shift
for a while until the “D” shift indicator comes on with the from a higher to a lower gear can severely damage the
brake pedal depressed vehicle. In addition, your vehicle may lose its stability and be
at / be a high risk
• When driving on a down hill, never shift the selector lever to
“N” If you try to shift the lever to “D” from “N”, a sudden gear • A high engine speed can cause your vehicle to move abruptly
engagement can damage the drive train from the parked position. To avoid this, wait until the engine
rpm becomes stable
• HDC (Hill Descent Control) is designed for driving down a
steep hill. When HDC is applied, do not shift to “N”. • When you start off on a hill after stopping and parking the
Otherwise, HDC will get deactivated vehicle, wait for a while until the “D” shift indicator comes on,
with the brake pedal depressed
• Even though you can start the engine with the selector lever
in both “P” or “N”, for your safety, always start the engine
with the selector lever in “P”

• Do not move the gear selector lever into “N” position while automatically engaged. Then will provide required thrust
the HDC (Hill Descent Control) system is operating. Doing so /acceleration.
stops the operation of HDC system
• Do not press the accelerator pedal and the brake pedal at
the same time • Do not use the kickdown function while driving on slippery or
• We suggest that right leg only should be used for operating sharply curved roads
brake and accelerator pedal. • If you use the kickdown function too frequently, the durability
and fuel economy of the vehicle will get worsen
14.7.10 Creep Function
14.7.12 Engine Braking
Without any actuation of the accelerator pedal, your vehicle will
move slowly if the selector lever is in any position other than “P” or When the accelerator pedal is released while the vehicle is in
“N”. This is called the creep effect. You can control your vehicle’s motion, the engine speed decreases. On a down hill, engaging a
movement by only applying the brake in heavy traffic or narrow lower gear can generate a higher engine braking and eventually
lanas. slow down the vehicle speed. By using engine behavior as a brake,
you can decrease your vehicle speed without excessively using the
brake system. lower the gear, higher the braking force.
On a steep decline or incline, your vehicle may move in the
opposite direction of the intended direction despite the creep
effect. When stopping on a steep hill, always depress the brake
pedal • Do not excessively apply the brake pedal while going down a
long slope. The brake system will overheat, experience vapor
lock or the fade phenomenon, and lose the braking efficiency.
14.7.11 Kickdown Function
• Be aware that the engine brake does not work when the
If you need to accelerate rapidly, or on sudden acceleration, a lower gear selector lever is in the ‘N’ position
gear will automatically be engaged. Then, a lower gear will be

• Avoid any abrupt engine braking on slippery roads, or the when the vehicle is standstill for longer durations with the engine
tyres may slip idling.
14.7.13 Gear Indicator

Coasting the vehicle with the gear lever in neutral and engine
ON/OFF is not recommended. In an event of panic braking, you
will not have the power of engine braking to slow down the
vehicle. This may lead to personal injury or accident.
Do not leave the vehicle with the gear lever in neutral position.
Always engage manual parking brake before leaving the vehicle,
to prevent any vehicle movement leading to possible injury to a
bystander or damage to vehicle.
Gear up-shift/down-shift is indicated win an up/down arrow head/ 14.7.15 Limp Home Mode (LHM)
triangle
When there is a malfunction in the transmission, it goes into Limp
Home Mode to maintain minimum driving conditions and also to
14.7.14 Neutral Position prevent critical transmission damage. This status is indicated by
the transmission check lamp illumination in the instrument cluster.
This position stops the transmission of power from the engine to Contact the nearest Authorised Mahindra Dealer for further
drive axle. With the gear lever is in neutral and brakes released, the assistance.
vehicle can move freely by pushing or towing. The engine can be
started in this mode. It is always recommended to keep the brake
pedal depressed in this position. It is advisable to shift into neutral

The transmission is held either in 3rd/ 5th gear when LHM is The ESP cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting
activated is possible. Needs to be driven carefully to nearest on the vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded by
service center. prevailing road conditions. The ESP cannot prevent accidents,
including those resulting from excessive speed in turns, driving
on very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. Only a safe, attentive,
14.8 Electronic Stability Program (ESP) (if equipped) and skilful driver can prevent accidents. The capabilities of an
ESP-equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or
This system enhances directional control and stability of the vehicle dangerous manner that could jeopardise the user’s safety or
under various driving conditions. The ESP corrects for over-steering the safety of others.
and under-steering behaviour of the vehicle by applying the brake of
the appropriate wheel automatically. Engine power may also be
reduced or AT gears may be downshifted to assist in counteracting 14.8.1 ESP ON (If equipped)
the condition of over-steer or under-steer and help the vehicle
maintain the desired path. Whenever the vehicle is started, the ESP system will be in active
mode. This mode should be used for most driving conditions.
ESP uses steering angle sensors and YAW rate sensor to
determine the path that the driver intends to steer the vehicle and When the ESP is in operation, ESP indicator lamp
compares it to the actual path of the vehicle. When the actual path blinks in the instrument cluster.
does not match the intended path, the ESP applies the brake of the
appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting the condition of over-
steer or under-steer.
When the ESP is operating, you can feel a slight pulsation in the
O v e r - s t e e r - When the vehicle is turning more than appropriate for vehicle. This is only the effect of brake control and indicates
the steering wheel position. nothing unusual.
U n d e r - s t e e r - When the vehicle is turning less than appropriate for
When moving out of the mud or slippery road, accelerator
the steering wheel position. response may be different because ESP system controls the
engine RPM to come out of this slippery road condition. This is
normal.

14.8.2 ESP OFF (If equipped)

Mahindra recommends that ESP be operational in all normal
driving conditions.
When ESP is in OFF mode, other functions like HHC (Hill Hold
Control) HBA (Hydraulic Brake Assist), HDC (Hill Descent
Control), DTC (Drag Torque Control), ROM (Roll Over Mitigation)
3
will be in working mode.
2
1
However, for safety reasons, if the ESP system detects that the
vehicle is going into a unstable condition, ESP will be
automatically activated on depressing the brake pedal
ESP, by default, will be in ON condition for every ignition cycle.
In some driving conditions, to maximise traction, it may be beneficial
to de-activate ESP. If the ESP indicator blinks while driving, it indicates
that ESP is working. If this indicator illuminates
Such conditions are: continuously, it indicates a malfunction in the ESP
• To start in deep snow or on a loose surface system. Drive carefully to the nearest Authorised Mahindra Dealer
and get the ESP system checked.
• Driving in deep sand
• Driving through deep mud etc.
To de-activate ESP, press ESP OFF button on the RH
side switch bank. Once ESP OFF mode is selected, a
warning indicator illuminates in the instrument
cluster.
Press ESP OFF button again to activate ESP function.

14.9 Traction Control System (TCS) (if equipped) 2H and 4H Modes:
TCS function is part of Electronic Stability Program (ESP). It is ESP ON

intended to enhance the stability & acceleration when wheel spin is This is the normal operating mode for ESP in 2H & 4H range.
occurred. It monitors the speed sensor input on each wheels and
uses brakes or engine torque control to provide optimum tractive ESP OFF
force on driven wheels during acceleration in slippery surfaces. A
feature of TCS, Braking Traction Control (BTC), functions similar to
the locking differential and controls the wheel spin across driven
axle. If more than one wheel on driven axle is spinning faster than
the other, the system will apply the brake on spinning wheel. This
will allow more engine torque to be transferred to the wheel that is
not spinning. BTC remains enabled even in ESP off mode. To 3
2
effectively use the BTC system the driver should gradually 1
accelerate in a situation where 'wheel slip' is occurring. This will

allow the sensors to determine the need to apply the brake to the
slipping wheels
The ESP system has two available operating modes in 2H & 4H This mode is entered by momentarily pushing the
modes. The system has one operating mode in 4L mode. ESP OFF switch. When in “ESP OFF” mode, the TCS
portion of ESP (except for Braking Traction Control
described in TCS section) gets disabled and the “ESP OFF” indicator
light turns ON. This mode is intended to be used if the vehicle is in
deep snow, sand and gravel in order to gain the traction. In ESP
OFF mode, the engine torque reduction and stability features are
disabled. Therefore enhanced vehicle stability offered by ESP is
unavailable until the vehicle speed reaches the approximate speed
of 55 kmph. For speeds at or exceeding approximately 55 kmph,
the ESP goes into normal “ESP On” mode automatically in order to
maintain the vehicle stability. To turn the ESP on again, momentarily

push the ESP OFF switch. This will restore the normal “ESP ON” disabled and the “ESP OFF” indicator light will be illuminated.
mode of operation This mode is intended to be used in ‘Off-Roading’ conditions in
order to gain the traction. In ESP OFF mode, the engine torque
reduction and stability features are disabled, the ESP stability
functions like Vehicle Dynamics Control & Roll Over Mitigation
When in ESP OFF mode, the engine torque reduction feature will not engage to assist in maintaining stability. ESP OFF
TCS (except Braking Traction Control feature described in TCS indicator will be illuminated continuously in this mode.
section) gets disabled and enhanced vehicle stability features
offered by ESP systems are disabled. In an emergency
maneuver, the ESP stability functions like Vehicle Dynamics 14.10 Driving Your Vehicle
Control & Roll Over Mitigation will not engage to assist in
maintaining stability. This mode is intended for Off-Road use 14.10.1 General Driving Precautions
only. ESP OFF indicator will be illuminated continuously in this
mode.
4L Mode:
Always observe the following precautions to minimize the risk of
ESP OFF accidents leading to serious personal injury or damage to your
vehicle.
This is the normal operating mode for ESP in 4L
mode. Whenever the vehicle is started in 4L range, • Before you drive your vehicle, please read this manual carefully.
or the transfer case is shifted from 2H or 4H or • Before you start driving, check proper operation of the brakes
Neutral mode to 4L mode, the ESP system will be in this mode. In and steering system.
4L mode, the ESP & TCS, except for the Braking Traction Control
(BTC) feature described in TCS section are disabled. The “ESP OFF” • If, while driving, you hear any strange noise or feel unusual
indicator lamp will be illuminated continuously in this mode. vibration, or if you have any concerns whatsoever, or if any
warning lamps illuminate or buzzers sound, park/stop the
vehicle in a safe location as soon as possible. Identify the cause
and take ecessary remedial action. Contact your Authorized
When in “ESP OFF” mode, the TCS portion of ESP (except for Mahindra Dealer if necessary.
Braking Traction Control described in TCS section) gets

• Never overload or improperly load your vehicle. • Maintain steering wheel control at all times, especially on rough
terrains. Sudden changes in terrain can result in abrupt steering
• Always be attentive while driving and follow safe driving
wheel motion. Make sure you grip the steering wheel from the
practices.
outside. Do not grip the spokes.
• Always maintain the recommended inflation pressure in tires.
• If the vehicle goes from one type of surface to another (e.g. from
• Always drive at a safe speed appropriate for given driving concrete to gravel/sand/mud/snow) there will be a change in
conditions. You must follow the speed limits. the way the vehicle responds, especially the way it responds to
steering, braking and accelerating inputs.
• While backing up, keep a constant lookout for people, particularly
children, or other obstructions or hazardous material that might • Be extremely careful while driving on loose pavements, loose
be present behind the vehicle. sand, water, gravel, snow or ice.
• Avoid loading any items on the roof that will raise the vehicle’s • If your vehicle goes off the edge of the pavement, slow down, but
center of gravity and make your vehicle more unstable. avoid severe brake or steering application. Ease the vehicle back
onto the pavement only after reducing your speed. Do not turn
• Loaded vehicles, with a higher center of gravity, may handle the steering wheel too sharply while returning to the road
differently than unloaded vehicles. Extra precautions, such as surface.
slower speeds and increased stopping distance, should be taken
when driving a heavily loaded vehicle. • It may be safer to stay on the apron or shoulder of the road and
slow down gradually before returning to the pavement. You may
• Always slow down in gusty crosswinds. Because of its profile and loose control if you do not slow down or if you turn the steering
higher center of gravity, your vehicle is more sensitive to side wheel too sharply or abruptly.
winds than an ordinary passenger car. Slowing down will allow
you to have much better control. • In an unavoidable emergency situation where a sudden sharp
turn must be made, turn the steering wheel only as rapidly and
• When driving off-road or on rugged terrain, do not drive at as far as required to avoid the emergency. Excessive steering will
excessive speeds, jump, make sharp turns, strike objects, etc. result in less vehicle control. Additionally, smooth variations of
This may cause loss of control or vehicle rollover causing serious the accelerator and/or brake pedal pressure should be utilized if
injury. You are also risking expensive damage to your vehicle's changes in vehicle speed are called for. Avoid abrupt steering,
suspension and chassis. acceleration or braking which could result in an increased risk of

loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover and/or personal injury. 14.10.3 If your vehicle is submerged
Use all available road surfaces to return the vehicle to a safe
direction of travel. If Your stationary Vehicle is Submerged ove r the bumper
14.10.2 Off Road Driving Precautions
• When driving off-road or on rugged terrains, never overspeed or

make sharp turns. This may cause loss of control or vehicle
rollover causing serious injury.
• Maintain steering wheel control at all times. Sudden changes in
terrain can result in abrupt steering wheel motion.
• Do not drive horizontally or diagonally across steep slopes, your
vehicle can tip over sideways. Driving straight up or straight
down is preferred. • Contact your Mahindra Authorised Dealer immediately
• Drive cautiously to avoid vehicle damage from concealed objects • Have the vehicle towed to nearest Mahindra Authorised Dealer
such as rocks and stumps. You should either know the terrain or to check any entry of water into the engine
map-out your route before driving in the area. • All fluids including engine and transmission fluids required to be
• Always perform a maintenance inspection after each day of off- changed incase of water ingress and contamination
road driving that has taken you through rough terrain, sand, mud
or water.
Never attempt to start the engine, without the advice from
Mahindra Authorised Dealer technician.
Post off roading, heavy mud slurry need to be cleaned from • Never drive through water when it flows above the bottom
Radiator, Condenser, Oil cooler etc., to avoid Engine portion of the bumper or above the tyre centre line
overheating.

• The engine could get damaged internally, if attempts are made impairing your vision In extreme conditions you may get a water
to cross through deep water wedge formation between the road and tyre causing loss of
control in the vehicle.
• Wet brake discs have a lower coefficient of friction resulting in
reduced braking efficiency. Dab the brake pedal while driving to • The ground under the water might not be firm which could result
remove the film of water the water being deeper than expected when driving the vehicle
through it.
14.10.4 Driving Through Water • Do not stop or shut OFF the engine while immersed in water. It
helps in preventing water getting inside the exhaust pipes.
Although your vehicle is capable of driving through shallow water,
• When backing down a ramp, do not allow the exhaust tail pipe to
there are a number of precautions that must be considered before
immerse in water.
entering the water.
• Water can wash the grease from wheel bearings, causing
rusting and premature failure. It may also enter the differentials,
transmission and transfer case, reducing the oil's lubricating
Never drive through still water that is higher than the bottom of qualities. If these are submerged in water, the lubricants should
the axle hubs. Not following this instruction will allow water to be replaced as required.
enter vehicle components causing internal damage to the
components, affecting driveability, safety, emissions and • Water entering the transmission will cause deterioration in shift
reliability. quality, locking up of your transmission accompanied by vibration,
When driving through water, drive very slowly and at constant and ultimately damaging the transmission.
speed, less than 8 kmph. Drive with accelerator pedal in OFF • Sand, mud/sludge that has accumulated in brake drums and
and control speed using only the brakes. At higher speed waves around brake discs may affect braking efficiency. This may also
can be generated by the front of the vehicle. These water damage brake system components. Wet brakes cannot stop the
waves may enter air intake, causing severe engine damage or vehicle as effectively as dry brakes. Drying can be improved by
cause a vehicle to get stalled. driving the vehicle slowly while applying light pressure on the
You must slow down while driving through shallow water. brake pedal.
Speeding may cause water to splash onto the windshield,

• When driving through water, traction or brake capability may be • Check for accumulations of plants or bushes. or polyethylene /
limited. Always perform a maintenance inspection after each day plastic These could be a fire hazard. They might damage to fuel
of off-road driving that has taken you through water. lines, brake tubes/hoses, etc.
• Inspect all the tubes/hoses and check for any fluid leakages.
14.10.5 Flowing Water • Get heat exchangers (radiator and condenser) cleaned.
If the water is swift flowing and rising (as in storm run-off) avoid • Check threaded fasteners for looseness, particularly on the
crossing until the water level recedes and/or the flow rate is chassis, drive train components, steering, suspension and
reduced. brakes. Visit nearest dealer for under body check and
retorqueing the fasteners.
The flowing water can erode the streambed causing your vehicle to
sink into deeper water. • We also recommend that the vehicle be checked at the
Authorised Dealer for any water entry into the transmission/
Determine the exit point(s) that are downstream of your entry point axle or the engine
to compensate for drifting.
14.10.6 After Driving Off-road or through Water Abrasive material in any part of the brakes may cause
excessive wear or unpredictable braking. You might not have
Off-road operation puts more stress on your vehicle than does most full braking power when needed leading to accidents. If you have
on-road driving. Always perform a maintenance inspection after been operating the vehicle in off-road conditions, get the brakes
each day of off-road driving that has taken you through rough checked and cleaned as necessary.
terrain, sand, mud, or water.
• If any unusual vibration is experienced, check the wheels for
• After going off-road, it is always a good idea to check for damage. impacted material. Impacted material can cause a wheel
Completely inspect the underbody of the vehicle for any imbalance. Get it inspected/corrected as soon as possible.
damages.
• After driving through deep water, inspect your vehicle fluids and
lubricants (engine oil, transmission/transfer case/axle oils) to
ensure the fluids have not been contaminated.

14.11 4WD System

Mud splashes will deposit in various components under chassis
and under bonnet depending on the nature of track you are
driving. While your THAR is a capable off roader, it would need Failure to completely engage any transfer case position can
drivers attention & care under certain driving conditions. While cause 4WD system damage or loss of power and vehicle
driving into sludge (mud + water) tracks with your 4x4, be control. Do not drive the vehicle unless the transfer case is
aware that the slush will splash and settle on various completely engaged. Accidents may happen.
components. The following precautions need to be taken;
• It is recommended to avoid usage of AC as it may result in
fan vibrations. Removal of mud deposits through deep
cleaning Immediately after off roading will resume the
operation back to normal
A/C
• Do not over-speed
• Do not let the muddy slush dry up specially on radiator
/condenser /fan motor etc which will cause suboptimal
performance /Engine overheating due to restricted air flow
• Take the vehicle to a wash immediately after off roading and
get it cleaned under the chassis /under bonnet components The 4WD system can be used for slippery & loose roads, off terrain
before mud dries on it. This will protect your vehicle from driving, hilly terrain regions in which more traction is required.
unforeseen breakdowns Driving in the 4H and 4L positions on hard-surfaced roads will
cause increased tire wear and damage to the driveline
components.
The 4WD/2WD shift is done by the small 4WD lever next to the
gear lever. 4WD indicator on the instrument cluster alerts whether
the vehicle is in 4WD mode. The 4WD system allows you to choose

between Four different modes depending on the torque 4 H : All four wheels are driven at 1:1 speed ratio. This mode
requirement. provides additional traction and maximum pulling power for loose,
slippery road surfaces such as ice, snow, gravel, sand and dry
• 2H (Two wheel drive high)
pavement. Front and rear axles are locked together in this mode
• 4H (Four wheel drive high) which forces the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same
speed.
• N (Neutral)
N : : Used only for towing in case of flat tyres or breakdown. (Vehicle
• 4L (Four wheel drive low) equipped with automatic transmission to be towed strictly in N
mode of transfer case)
Transfer Case is a part time manual shift system. There is no synchronizer
in transfer case and hence Shifting while the front or rear axles rotating at
different speeds can cause damage to the transfer case. Accidents may happen if you leave the vehicle unattended with
Vehicle is equipped with electric front axle disconnect (FAD). There may be the transfer case in the NEUTRAL (N) position without first fully
a slight delay and ratcheting noise while FAD is engaging as the splines engaging the parking brake. The transfer case NEUTRAL (N)
may not be aligned. This is normal. position disengages both the front and rear axle from the
Proper operation of four-wheel drive vehicles depends on tires of equal size, powertrain, and will allow the vehicle to roll, even if the
type, and circumference on each wheel. Any difference will adversely affect automatic transmission is in PARK (or manual transmission is
shifting and cause damage to the transfer case. in gear). The parking brake should always be applied when the
driver is not in the vehicle.
14.11.1 Operating Instructions/Precautions 4 L : Use this mode for maximum pulling power and traction. Use the
4L position for climbing or descending steep hills, off-road driving,
Transfer case provides four mode positions; 2 H , 4 H , N a n d 4 L . hard pulling in sand, mud or deep snow. Driving in the 4L position
2 H : Only the rear wheels are driven at 1:1 speed ratio. Use this
on dry hard surfaced roads may cause increased tire wear and
mode for normal driving on normal street, dry hard-surfaced roads damage to driveline components. Take care not to over rev the
& highway conditions. This position gives greater fuel economy, engine and do not exceed 40 kmph when driving in this mode.
quietest ride and least tire wear. When operating your vehicle in 4L, the engine speed is considerably

higher than that of the 4H position at a given road speed. Do not 14.11.2 Shifting Procedure
exceed 40kmph.
Exceeding 25 mph (40 km/h) while the transfer case is

engaged in 4L may result in an engine overspeed condition and
engine damage
Because the four-wheel drive provides improved traction, there Shifting Between 2H and 4H
is a tendency to exceed safe turning and stopping speeds.
Shifting between 2H and 4H can be made with the vehicle stopped
• Do not believe than you can go faster than road conditions or in motion (speed less than 4-5Kmph). If the vehicle is in motion,
permit release the accelerator pedal and maintain very low speed until
transfer case is completely engaged.
• Do not shift to a lower gear than necessary to maintain
forward motion
• Over-revving the engine can spin the wheels and traction will Never operate the 4WD shifter lever if the wheels are slipping. Stop
be lost. You will not be able to stop or control your vehicle the slipping or spinning before operating the shifter
• Braking performance is dramatically reduced in wet/icy/
slippery conditions. Avoid abrupt downshifts on slippery
roads, engine braking may cause skidding and loss of control If transfer case is not properly engaged, whine noise may come
resulting in an accident from driveline. This is because mating teeth not being properly
aligned/engaged. In that case, stop the vehicle and start driving
again.
To shift from 4H to 2H, move the selector lever to the 2H position.
Vehicle may needs to be stopped for completely for proper
disengaging from 4WH/4WL.

To Shift from 4H to 4L (also for in between N mode): To Shift from 4L to 4H (also for in between N mode):
1. When the vehicle speed is 3 to 5 kmph, shift an automatic 1. When the vehicle speed is 3 to 5 kmph, shift an automatic
transmission in to NEUTRAL (N), or press the clutch pedal transmission into NEUTRAL (N), or press the clutch pedal on
on a manual tranmission and shift the transfer case lever a manual transmission and shift the transfer case lever
firmly to 4L. firmly to 4H
2. P u s h d o w n t h e 4 W D s h i f t e r k n o b and shift the transfer case 2. Shift the transfer case lever to the N position, push down
lever to the N P o s i t i o n , release the knob and then shift to 4L the 4WD shifter knob and shift to 4H, release the knob (D o
position ( D o n o t p a u s e w i t h t h e t r a n s f e r c a s e i n N ( N e u t r a l ) . not pause with the transfer case in N (Neutral).
3. Once the shift is completed, Press brake to stop vehicle and 3. Once the shift is completed, Press brake to stop vehicle and
place the automatic transmission in to DRIVE or release the place the automatic transmission into DRIVE or release the
clutch pedal on a manual transmission. clutch pedal on a manual transmission.
Shifting into or out of 4L with the vehicle completely stopped, • In heavy snow or when pulling a load, or for additional control
difficulty may occur due to the mating teeth not being properly at slower speeds, select a low gear and/or shift the transfer
aligned. Several attempts may be required for clutch teeth case to the 4L range.
alignment and shift completion to occur. The preferred method
is with the vehicle rolling at 3 to 5 kmph • Over-revving the engine can spin the wheels and traction will
be lost
Avoid attempting to engage or disengage 4L with the vehicle • Avoid abrupt gear shifts on slippery roads, engine braking
moving faster than 5 kmph may cause skidding and loss of control

14.11.3 Do’s and Don’ts Do not drive with 4WD engaged (4H, 4L) on the tarmac road to
avoid damage to the gearbox. Vehicle is having a part-time 4WD
Do’s: and is not meant to be driven in 4WD on the tarmac road
• While shifting between 2H-4H-2H, it is a good practice to stop Do not press the clutch while descending steep hills as you may
the vehicle and then shift the transfer case lever lose control of the vehicle. Always descend in-gear
• While shifting from 4H to N and N to 4H, Shifter knob should be
Do not drive with 4WD on hard surfaced roads. This may lead to
pressed down in order to avoid damage to the shift system
difficulty in shifting from 4WD. Incase need to release 4WD, drive
• Learn to use the power band. the vehicle in reverse direction to some distance.
• 4-Low (4L) is recommended for soft and boggy conditions, while
4-High (4H) may be used in places where speed may be 14.12 Hill Descent Control (HDC) (if equipped)
required. For example – Sand
• Always use 4L to descent steep slopes to take maximum
advantage of engine braking
While ascending or descending hills, always be parallel to the slope
to ensure maximum stability of the vehicle
Don’ts: 2
3
Avoid taking the engine to the redline (maximum rpm). It’s not only
inefficient but it also means you’re not getting the maximum power
from the engine
Never half-clutch in off-road. Make it a practice to use it only to Assists the driver to descend a steep hill (max. 50% inclination) by
change gears. This will prolong clutch life and is also safer in off- means of brake intervention limiting the vehicle speed is without
road situations as you can utilize maximum engine braking driver's input.

During HDC, if the wheel slip becomes excessive, ABS will be

activated automatically.
The descent speed increases only if the gradient is sufficiently
HDC is a user-intended function. To activate, press HDC button on steep to cause the vehicle to accelerate as the braking effect is
the switch bank. The LED on the button illuminates indicating the reduced. On a shallow slope, pressing the “SET +” button may
status. Press the button again to deactivate HDC. result in no speed increase.
During a descent, if the vehicle speed is more than the rated If the brake pedal is depressed when HDC is active, HDC is
speeds (refer recommended shift speeds), HDC (if selected) overridden and the brakes will perform as normal (a pulsation
automatically operates the brakes to slow the vehicle and maintain might be felt through the brake pedal). If the brake pedal is then
a speed relative to the selected gear and the accelerator pedal released, HDC will recommence operating, if necessary.
position.
HDC system monitors the brake temperature continuously. If brake
HDC will also work in neutral gear, and maintains the vehicle rolling application is continuous and brake temperatures are too high,
speed by operating brakes automatically. HDC will deactivate HDC deactivates automatically. This is to ensure that the brake
automatically, if the vehicle speed is exceeds approximately 60 pads are not worn due to continuous brake application.
kmph.
While HDC is controlling the vehicle speed, descent speeds can be
varied using cruise control switches mounted on the steering HDC will also work in neutral gear, and maintain the vehicle
wheel. rolling speed by operating brakes automatically. HDC will
deactivate automatically. If the vehicle speed exceeds 60kmph.
To decrease speed, press and hold “SET -” button. The vehicle
speed at the point of switch release will become the new descent
speed.
To increase, press and hold “SET +” button. The vehicle speed at
the point of switch release will become the new descent speed.
Alternatively, descent speeds can be adjusted by tapping the “SET
_” or “SET +” buttons. Each press of the button will adjust the speed
by approximately 0.5 kmph.

14.13 Hill Hold Control (HHC) (if equipped) 14.14 Cruise Control (if equipped)
Hill Hold Control with acceleration sensor identifies gradients and Cruise control allows you to maintain a set speed without the need
holds the vehicle for about three to four seconds after the brakes to keep your foot on the accelerator pedal. It should be used for
have been released in order to prevent the vehicle from accidentally cruising on straight, open highways. Never use it for city driving,
rolling backwards during a hill start. inclines, winding roads, slippery roads, heavy rain or in bad weather
conditions.
Imagine a situation where your vehicle is stopped on an uphill
incline. If you release the brake while moving off, there are chances It works on the closed loop system principle to maintain the set
that your vehicle may roll back. HHC helps in such situations by speed of the vehicle; the system controls the fuel injection of the
holding the vehicle from rolling back. engine in order to maintain the set speed.
HHC operation cannot be intervened. For HHC to work, clutch A

pedal must be in fully pressed condition and gear engaged. C
B
D
HHC will only operate when the road gradient is >4% on both
uphill (nose up with any forward gears selected) and downhill 0
1 2
3
4
(nose down with reveres gear selected). Maximum gradient for A/C
HHC is 30%.
A Resume C Voice Command
B Cruise ON/OFF D Cruise Set +/-

Cruise control enhances your comfort while driving and allows you • If vehicle speed is increased by 10 kmph for more than 30 secs.
to effortlessly maintain the desired lane speed limit. Improper use of by pressing the accelerator pedal
the cruise control can lead to an accident.
When Set +/Set- switch is pressed for more than 12 secs. (In
this case, vehicle will not go into cruise mode in that ignition
cycle. In order to restore the cruise function, switch OFF the
Cruise control is designed to operate above a vehicle speed of ignition, wait for 30 secs. and switch ON the ignition)
35 kmph for all gears except 1st and reverse gears. The cruise
lamp in the instrument cluster functions only if the cruise Cruise influencing error not indicated by Check Engine Lamp,
control is active. OBD lamp, etc.
Cruise control will function only under the following conditions:

14.14.1 RESUME Button
• The vehicle is cruising above 35 kmph
With the help of RESUME, you can opt for the previous set cruising
• Engine RPM above 1200 or above 1500
speed of the vehicle in the same ignition cycle. This is best explained
• Clutch pedal released with the following example:
• Brake pedal released 1. Assume, you have activated cruise mode and set the vehicle
speed at 50 kmph.
• Cruise is activated first time in an ignition cycle by SET + button
2. Due to an obstacle or a sharp turn, you have deactivated the
• Subsequent cruise engagements can be done by RESUME SET+ cruise mode by pressing the brake pedal.
buttons in the same ignition cycle 3. Vehicle comes out of the cruise mode.
Cruise control is deactivated under the following conditions: 4. When the road condition is suitable to switch over back to
• CRUISE OFF button is pressed cruise control mode, press RESUME button once. The system
activates the cruise control mode to the previous cruising
• Brake or clutch pedal depressed speed of 50 kmph.
If the vehicle speed exceeds the cruise set speed by 30 kmph by 5. To resume the previous cruise set speed, the vehicle speed
accelerator pedal intervention should be above 35 kmph.

14.14.2 Cruise Control Activation 14.14.4 SET + Button
Drive the vehicle to the desired cruising speed (any value greater SET + button is used to activate cruise control and also to increase
than 35 kmph), press and hold the SET + button until the cruise the cruise set speed.
lamp in the instrument cluster illuminates.
To increase the speed in very small amounts, press the SET +
If cruise is deactivated (e. g. by depressing brake to handle an Button. Each time you press, the cruise set speed increases by
intervention in the road etc.) in current driving cycle, reactivate the about 2 kmph. When you wish to continuously increase the cruising
Cruise to the last active Cruise Speed by pressing the RESUME speed, press and hold the SET + Button and release when the
button. desired speed is reached.
Cruise control may not hold the set speed when you are going up or
down hills, and the vehicle may come out of cruise control. This is 14.14.5 SET - Button
indicated by the cruise lamp going OFF in the instrument cluster.
To decrease the speed in small amounts, press the SET - Button.
Each time you press, the cruise set speed decreases by about 2
14.14.3 Cruise Control De-activation kmph.
You can cancel cruise control in any of the following ways: When you wish to continuously decrease the cruising speed, press
and hold the SET- Button. When the desired speed is reached,
• Press the CRUISE OFF button in the steering wheel
release the button.
• Press the brake pedal
• Gear selector moved into neutral
If switch is pressed for more than 12 secs., the switch is
• HDC or ESP active assumed to be malfunctioning and the cruise functionality
ceases to function in that ignition cycle. To resume functionality,
ignition has to be toggled.

14.15 Fuel-BS VI
The cruise control is a convenience system designed to assist
the driver during vehicle operation. The driver should be alert of
road / traffic conditions and responsible for the vehicle brake
operation / steering control.
Never activate cruise control in traffic or when driven in

adverse road conditions (heavy rains, windy, slippery etc.)
14.14.6 Override Function F o r D i e s e l V a r i a n t - Use commercially available vehicular Ultra-low

Sulfur Highway Diesel that meets the BIS standard (IS 1460; 2017
This function enables user to ramp up the cruising speed to BS VI specification or equivalent). Information on diesel quality can
overtake front vehicle. normally be found in the fuel pump. Please contact filling station
The cruising speed can be increased by using accelerator pedal. personnel in case labels in the pump cannot be found. If the diesel
User has to complete this action within 30 secs. to maintain the fuel with high sulfur content (more than 10 PPM) and unspecified
cruise mode. If user exceeds the 30 secs. limit, cruise mode will be additives are used, it can cause the DPF system damage and
deactivated. emission warranty issues.
F o r P e t r o l V a r i a n t - Use only commercially available Petrol fuel
conforming to Indian Standard (IS 2796: 2017 BS-VI specification
or equivalent). Information on Petrol quality can normally be found in
the fuel pump. Please contact filling station personnel in case labels
in the pump cannot be found.

Do not fill the fuel tank or mix the fuel with alcohol based fuels Avoid inhaling fuel vapors and any skin or clothing contact.
and kerosene, etc. This will damage the engine, fuel and Direct skin contact with fuel or the inhalation of fuel vapor may
exhaust system components. affect your health.
It is recommended to maintaining a minimum of 10 liters of fuel in
the fuel tank. Driving the vehicle till the fuel tank is empty is not
If you have accidentally filled the fuel tank with incorrect or non- recommended. Always have sufficient fuel in the tank. Check the
approved fuel, do not start the vehicle. Contact an Authorized fuel level prior to starting your journey.
Mahindra Dealer to have the fuel system drained completely.
Never carry fuel in separate containers in the vehicle, it is

Petrol/Diesel is highly flammable and poisonous. It burns dangerous and may lead to an inadvertent fuel leak or spillage.
violently and can cause serious injury. Never allow sparks,
flames or smoking materials near petrol/Diesel. Turn OFF the
engine before refuelling. Whenever you are around petrol/ 14.15.1 Fuel-Lid Opening and Closing
Diesel extingush all smoking materials.
During freezing weather if the fuel is not winterized or is
insufficiently winterized, waxing/gelling may take place in the fuel,
leading to interruption in fuel supply to the engine. For smooth
functioning and reliable operation of the engine during cold weather
conditions, use winterized ULSD which is available at the filling
stations during winter months. Check with your fuel retailer for
further details.

The fuel lid is manually locked/unlocked from outside by using 14.15.2 Refilling DEF (Applicable for Diesel Variant)
conventional key.
To enable SCR system work efficiently and to ensure emission
compliance, It is recommended to use MaxiCLEAN DEF meeting IS
17042 (or) ISO 22241 specification.
CA E L V E
CA E L V E
FU MO
FU MO
RE
RE
US SP SL O
US SP SL O
E RA
E RA
IN Y WLY
IN Y WLY
JU MA
JU MA
R
R
Y
Y
DI
DI
Y
Y
ES
ES
EL
EL
CA E L V E
CA E L V E
FU MO
FU MO
RE
RE
US SP SL O
US SP SL O
E RA
E RA
IN Y WLY
IN Y WLY
JU MA
JU MA
RY Y
RY Y
DI
DI
ES
ES
EL
EL
Turn the fuel cap counter-clockwise to open. Refuel and put the cap
back in its place and tighten in the clockwise direction till three
distinct clicks are heard. Close the fuel lid shut.
Do not fill the Diesel fuel in the DEF tank. Which will causing the
Ensure the fuel cap and lid are securely closed before starting severe damage to the system.
the vehicle.

14.16 Tips for Better Fuel Economy • Combine errands and minimize stop-and-go driving
• Keep tires properly inflated. It is recommended to check your tire
Give due consideration to the points listed below for better
pressure in the morning when the tyre is cold
performance of vehicle and enhancement of fuel economy.
• Use recommended engine oil. Refer to the Maintenance Section
• Smooth, moderate operation will yield savings in fuel
for specifications and capacities
• Steady speeds without stopping will usually give the best fuel
• Replace the fuel filter and air filter at the recommended intervals
economy
• Shift gears at the recommended speeds and rpm bands only.
• Ensure that the parking brake is fully released
Refer to the gear shifting speed table for further details
• Idling for long periods of time will waste fuel
• Control the maximum speed between 90 to 100 kmph in
• Anticipate stopping; slowing down may eliminate the need to 6thgear to achieve the best fuel efficiency
stop
• Follow the recommended maintenance schedule and perform
• Sudden or hard accelerations reduce fuel economy the owner maintenance checks recommended
• Slow down gradually • Heavily loading a vehicle or towing a trailer will reduce fuel
economy
• Drive at moderate speeds
• Carrying unnecessary weight may reduce fuel economy
• Revving the engine before turning it off may reduce fuel economy
• Adding certain accessories to your vehicle may reduce fuel
• The air conditioner may reduce fuel economy
economy
• Warming up a vehicle in neutral on cold mornings is not required
• Four-wheel-drive operation (if equipped) is less fuel efficient than
and may reduce fuel economy
two-wheel-drive operation
• While idling put the gear shift lever in the neutral position
• Driving on flat terrains offer improved fuel economy as
• Resting your foot on the clutch pedal while driving will reduce fuel compared to driving on hilly terrains
economy
• Close windows during high speed driving for better fuel economy

• It is recommended to refuel in the mornings (cold weather

condition)
14.16.1 How to Calculate Fuel Efficiency (Mileage)

1. Ensure recommended tire pressure is maintained
2. Refuel your vehicle till the fuel gun at the fuel station is auto-
cut-off
3. Reset trip meter to zero
4. Drive at a moderate speed for a minimum distance of 150 km
5. Refuel at the same fuel station till the auto-cut-off mode
6. Assuming ‘a’ liters of fuel was filled and ‘b’ was the trip meter
reading. Fuel Efficiency = b/a kmpl
7. We recommend that point no.2 and point no.5 should be done
in cold conditions (In mornings)

WHEELS AND TYRES
15 WHEELS AND TYRES A Max Load Limit
15.1 Tyre Information B Tyre Size
Radial tyres or bias-ply tyre - A radial tyre has “RADIAL/

C STEEL BELTED RADIAL” on the sidewall. A tyre not marked
The tyres fitted in this vehicle meet the requirements of BIS and with “RADIAL” is a bias-ply tyre.
they comply with the requirements under the Central Motor
Vehicles Rules (CMVR] 1989 “TUBELESS” or “TUBE TYPE” - A tubeless tyre does not have
a tube inside the tyre and air is directly filled in the tyre. A
D tube type tyre has a tube inside the tyre and the tube
maintains the air pressure.
TUB
EL
ES
S
C 15.2 Tyre Rating
Your vehicle is originally equipped with tyres supplied by a reputed

manufacturer. If you ever have any questions regarding your tyres,
D please refer to literature supplied by the tyre manufacturer, or to
the separate tyre warranty provided by the tyre manufacturer. You
may also contact Mahindra directly, or the tyre manufacturer.
A
The tyre rating of your vehicle is;
B
• 245/75 R16 (or) 255/65 R18

WHEELS AND TYRES
Tyre rating is explained as below; 15.2.1 Speed Rating
245 75 R 16 100 S MAX SPEED MAX SPEED

CAPABILITY CAPABILITY
SPEED SYMBOL SPEED SYMBOL
KM/HR KM/HR
L 120 T 190
M 130 U 200
Tyre size (example: P245/75 R16 100S) N 140 H 210
P 150 V 240
( A ) : 2 4 5 ( T h r e e - d i g i t n u m b e r ) : This number gives the width in
millimeters of the tyre from sidewall edge to sidewall edge. This is Q 160 W 270
called ‘Section Width’. R 170 Y 300
( B ) : 7 5 ( T w o - d i g i t n u m b e r ) : This number, known as the aspect ratio, S 180 Z 240+
gives the tyres ratio of height to section width.
( C ) : R This is the tyre Construction Code. The ‘R’ stands for Radial. 15.3 Tyre Label (Vehicle Placard)
( D ) : 1 6 ( T w o - d i g i t n u m b e r ) : This number is the wheel or rim diameter
The tyre Label (Vehicle Placard) is located on the driver door B pillar
in inches. inner edge/face. This placard gives you important information
( E ) : 1 0 0 ( T w o o r t h r e e d i g i t n u m b e r ) : This number is the tyres load about the tyre size designed for your vehicle, and the tyre inflation
index. It is a measurement of how much weight each tyre can pressures for the front and rear tyres.
support.
( F ) : S Tyre speed rating or speed symbol. Never drive the vehicle
faster than the tyre speed rating. The speed rating denotes the
speed at which a tyre is designed to be driven for extended periods
of time under a standard condition of load and inflation pressure.

WHEELS AND TYRES
15.4 Tyre Pressure
Proper tyre inflation pressure is essential to the safe and

satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Three primary areas are
affected by improper tyre pressure;
SEE OWNERS
MANUAL FOR
P245/75 R16
P255/65 R18
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
SIZE
FRONT/REAR/SP
34psi/2.4bar/240k
34psi/2.4bar/240k
ARE
pa
pa
COLD TYRE
PRESSURE
TYRE INFORM
ATION
• Safety
• Economy
• Ride Comfort and Vehicle Stability
Proper tyre inflation contributes to a comfortable and safe ride.
Overinflating produces a jarring and uncomfortable ride. Both
TYRE INFORMATION underinflation and overinflation affect the stability of the vehicle and
TYRE SIZE COLD TYRE PRESSURE can produce a feeling of sluggish response or over responsiveness
in the steering. Unequal tyre pressures can cause erratic and
FRONT/REAR P245/75 R16 34psi/2.4bar/240kPa unpredictable steering response or may cause the vehicle to drift
FRONT/REAR P255/65 R18 32psi/2.2bar/220kPa left or right.
SPARE SEE ABOVE
Improper inflation pressures can cause uneven wear patterns to
SEE OWNER’S MANUAL FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION develop across the tyre tread. These abnormal wear patterns will
reduce tread life resulting in a need for earlier tyre replacement.
Under inflation also increases tyre rolling resistance and results in
higher fuel consumption.
Never overload your vehicle. Overloading can cause tyre failure,
affect vehicle handling, and increase your stopping distance,
resulting in an accident and/or personal injury.
The proper cold tyre inflation pressure is listed in the tyre Label
Improperly inflated tyres can adversely affect vehicle handling
(Vehicle Placard), located on the front passenger side inner B-
or can fail unexpectedly, resulting in an accident and/or
pillar.
personal injury.

WHEELS AND TYRES
15.4.1 Inspection and Adjustment Procedure At least once a month or before long trips, inspect each tyre and
check the tyre pressure with a tyre gauge (including spare tyre).
The tyre pressure should be checked and adjusted, as well as Inflate all tyres to the recommended inflation pressure.
inspected for signs of tyre wear or visible damage, at least once a
month. Use a good quality pressure gauge to check tyre pressure.
Do not make a visual judgement when determining proper inflation.
Radial tyres may look properly inflated even when they are Under-inflation is the most common cause of tyre failures and
underinflated. At the same time, each tyre should be inspected for may result in severe tyre cracking, tread separation or
signs of tyre wear or visible damage. “blowout”, with unexpected loss of vehicle control and increased
risk of injury. Under-inflation increases sidewall flexing and
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always cold tyre rolling resistance, resulting in heat buildup and internal damage
inflation pressures. Cold tyre inflation pressure is defined as the to the tyre. It also may result in unnecessary tyre stress,
tyre pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least irregular wear, loss of vehicle control and accidents.
three hours, or driven less than 1 km after a three-hour period.
Check tyre pressures more often if subject to a wide range of Always inflate your tyres to the recommended pressure even if it is
outdoor temperatures, as tyre pressures vary with temperature less than the maximum inflation pressure information found on the
changes. Tyre pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per tyre. The recommended tyre inflation pressure is found on the Tyre
7° C of air temperature change. Keep this in mind when checking Label which is located on the front passenger side inner B-pillar.
tyre pressure inside a garage, especially in the winter. Failure to follow the tyre pressure recommendations can cause
uneven tread wear patterns and adversely affect the way your
When it was new, the spare tyre in your vehicle was fully inflated. vehicle handles.
However, a spare tyre can lose pressure over time. In order to
avoid being stranded, check the spare tyre air pressure frequently.
If you overfill the tyre, release air by pushing the metal stem in
15.4.2 Inflating Your Tyres the center of the valve. Then recheck the pressure.
Safe operation of your vehicle requires that your tyres are properly
inflated. Remember that a tyre can lose up to half of its air
pressure without appearing flat.

WHEELS AND TYRES
After inspecting or adjusting the tyre pressure, always reinstall Avoid abrupt maneuvering and braking. This can cause tyre
the valve stem cap (if equipped). This will prevent moisture and deterioration and lead to loss of steering or braking control.
dirt from entering the valve stem, which could damage the
stem, resulting in an unexpected loss of tyre pressure, an
accident and/or personal injury. 15.4.5 Life of Tyre
The service life of a tyre is dependent upon various factors including
15.4.3 Radial Ply Tyres but not limited to;
• Driving style
• Tyre pressure
Combining radial ply tyres with other types of tyres on your
• Distance driven
vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle poorly, resulting in an
accident and/or personal injury. Always use radial tyres in sets
of four. Never combine them with other types of tyres.
Cuts and punctures in radial tyres are repairable only in the Tyres and the spare tyre should be replaced after six years,
tread area because of sidewall flexing. Consult your authorized regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to follow this warning
dealer for radial tyre repairs. can result in sudden and unexpected tyre failure, leading to an
accident and/or personal injury.
15.4.4 Tread Wear Indicators (TWI)

Tread wear indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread Keep dismounted tyres in a cool, dry place with as little
grooves. They will appear as bands when the tread depth becomes exposure to light as possible. Protect tyres from contact with
1/16 inch (2 mm). When the indicators appear in two or more oil, grease and fuels.
adjacent grooves, the tyre should be replaced.

WHEELS AND TYRES
15.5 Tyre Rotation Recommendations

Do not use a tyre, wheel size or speed rating other than that Type 1 - Applicable for all 5 Steel / 5 Alloy wheels
specified for your vehicle on the tyre placard. Combinations of
unapproved tyres and wheels may change suspension
geometric and performance characteristics, resulting in
changes to steering, handling and braking of your vehicle. This
can cause unpredictable handling, stress to steering and
suspension components. You could lose control of the vehicle
or the tyre can unexpectedly fail, resulting in an accident and/
or personal injury.
Replacing original tyres with tyres of a different size may result

in false speedometer and odometer readings. Tyres on the front and rear axles of vehicles operate at different
loads and perform different steering, handling, and braking
functions. For these reasons, they wear at unequal rates and
15.4.6 Snow Chains develop irregular wear patterns.
Snow chains cannot be used on these tyres. Rotation will increase tread life, help to maintain mud, snow, and
wet traction levels, and contribute to a smooth, quiet ride. Follow
the recommended tyre rotation frequency for your type of driving.
In case of harsh winter driving conditions, it is recommended Type 2 – Applicable for 4 Alloy wheels and Spare wheel with Steel rim
using winter tyres with the same specifications for better
stability, safety and performance. It is recommended rotating the tyres as per the “Maintenance
Schedule”.

WHEELS AND TYRES
The suggested rotation method is the “forward-cross” shown in the 15.5.2 Wheel Tightness
diagram. The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with
aggressive tread designs such as those on On/Off-road type tyres. When you change a wheel, remove all rust and dirt at all locations
where the wheel contacts the wheel hub. Use a scraper or wire
brush to be sure that you remove all rust and dirt. A loose wheel
could have damaged or elongated the holes in the rim, or damaged
the rim/hub assembly. If any of the wheel studs or nuts are
damaged, contact the nearest Authorized Mahindra Dealer.
Always tighten the nuts in a crisscross sequence. Never use oil

or grease on your wheel studs or nuts.
Never over tighten the nuts on the wheel stud. You could
damage the stud or the nut.
Rotation will increase tread life, help to maintain mud, snow, and
wet traction levels, and contribute to a smooth, quiet ride. Follow Torque tighten the wheel nuts to the specified value at the
the recommended tyre rotation frequency for your type of driving. nearest Authorized Mahindra Workshop.
More frequent rotation is permissible if desired. The reasons for
any rapid or unusual wear should be corrected prior to rotation
being performed. The tyres fitted in this vehicle meet the requirements of BIS and
they comply with the requirements under the Central Motor
15.5.1 Changing a Flat tyre Vehicles Rules (CMVR) 1989.
Refer to “If you have a Flat tyre” section in the general chapter for
details.

WHEELS AND TYRES
15.6 Tiretronics (if equipped) The infotainment unit displays all alerts related to Tiretronics on the
infotainment screen and the instrument cluster indicates the visual
The tiretronics system checks the pressure and temperature of the warnings for all Tiretronics alerts.
air inside the pneumatic tyres of the vehicle. System alerts the
driver during driving if any of the tyre parameters are not in
acceptable limits due to any reason.
The system will continue to alert until the warning condition is
resolved to the actual placard values.
Appropriate tyre pressure and tyre temperature is required for;
• Adequate braking
• Road grip
• Vehicle handling
• Vehicle maneuvering
15.6.1 Operation of Tiretronics
• Reduced tyre wear and tear
• Reduced tyre strain and safety Tiretronics uses wireless sensor technology that is mounted on the
wheel rim to checks the tyre pressure levels. They transmit the
• Good fuel efficiency data to the receiver inside the vehicle which is in turn is
communicated and displayed on the infotainment screen and
instrument cluster.
In the infotainment screen all the tyre locations will display the
status as ‘OK’ if every tyre pressure and temperature are at
acceptable limits except for spare tyre. Spare tyre information on
tiretronics screen shall be available only during any alerts and
warning in the spare wheel. (User Shall verify spare tyre pressure

WHEELS AND TYRES
manually, In certain conditions system may not update pressure for 15.6.2 Tiretronics Warning Lamp
Spare tire correctly)
The Tiretronics has been customized only for the manufacturer’s
genuine tyres and wheels. Tiretronics pressure limits and warning
messages have been established and calibrated for the tyre size
equipped on your vehicle. Replacement of manufacturer’s parts
with a different size, type or style of components may damage the The Tiretronics warning lamp in the instrument cluster illuminates
sensor and lead to incorrect readings. for any alert condition and also for low/high tire pressure/High
temperature alerts and malfunction.
Do not use aftermarket tyre sealants or balance beads if your
vehicle is equipped with Tiretronics. Failure to comply may lead to
sensor damage. 15.6.3 Tiretronics Sensor Installation
The Tiretronics is not intended to replace normal tyre care and

maintenance or to warn of any tyre failure condition. The system TRANSMITTER
should not be used as a replacement for a pressure measuring VALVE RIB
gauge to adjust the vehicle tyre pressure.
Driving with under-inflated tyres cause the tyres to overheat and
may lead to tyre failure. Under-inflated tyres reduce fuel efficiency,
SCREW
tyre tread life and may affect the vehicle's maneuverability and
PLASTIC CAP
braking ability. LS VALVE STEM
It is the driver's responsibility to maintain correct tyre pressure

using an accurate pressure gauge, even if under-inflation has not 1. Line the sensor up with the rim hole and attach the insertion
reached the level to trigger illumination of the Tiretronics warning tool to the end of the valve ready for pull in
indicator. 2. Ensure the TTV insertion tool is positioned to the correct notch
and that the sensor is pulled through in a direction parallel to
the valve hole axis and NOT at an angle to it

WHEELS AND TYRES
3. The picture shows a correctly fitted sensor. Note the rubber 15.6.4 Tiretronics Sensor Removal
bulb of the valve resting against the rim and the front face of
the enclosure is NOT touching the rim. Apply tyre soap solution 1. Remove the tyre from the rim
to the rubber portion of the valve stem and the top of the 2. To remove the sensor, firstly remove the screw using a T10
enclosure TORX screwdriver
3. Carefully and firmly pull the enclosure straight back off the
valve
4. Place the inner tyre bead over the rim

5. Place the outer tyre bead over the rim
6. Inflate all tyres to the prescribed pressure, check the valve W12L06
area for leakage and re-balance the wheels prior to installing

back on the vehicle
Starting to mount the tyre from the valve location is a wrong

fitment. The fixing tool/stem may hit the sensor and damage it.
Start from the opposite direction.
W12L07

WHEELS AND TYRES
15.6.5 Functionalities of Tiretronics System
• Low Pressure Alert

• High Pressure Alert
• High Temperature Alert
• Pressure Leakage Alert
• Spare Tyre Swap
W12L08
• Sensor Signal Missing (Communication error)
4. Cut the rubber bulb and attach the TTV tool to the valve.
Remove the valve from the rim by pulling through the rim, or • Tiretronics Sensor Faulty.
simply pull through without cutting the bulb
5. Lift the outer tyre bead over the rim using a tyre tool
The valve must be positioned just left of the start position

to avoid sensor damage. Do not touch the sensor with the
tyre tool.
6. Lift the inner tyre bead over the rim using the tyre tool
7. Remove existing valve stem
Starting to mount the tyre from the valve location is a wrong

fitment. Fixing tool/stem may hit the sensor and damage it.
Start from the opposite direction.

WHEELS AND TYRES
Low Pressure Alert High Pressure Alert
Low pressure monitoring is to indicate low tyre pressure. Please High pressure monitoring is to indicate high pressure alert. Please
note the following points. note the following points.
• Low pressure alert will be set only when the tyre pressure value • High pressure alert will be set only when the tyre pressure value
goes to certain values goes to certain values
• Low pressure alert in the main alert screen will pop up once for • High pressure alert in the main alert screen will pop up once for
driver notification when the alert is set and the vehicle is in driver notification when the alert is set and the vehicle is in
running condition. Otherwise the alert will remain in the running condition. Otherwise the alert will remain in the
information screen and alert register screen tiretronics screen
• If low pressure is observed, respective tyre should be rectified • If high pressure value is observed, air has to be released from
with cause of low pressure and then fill air the respective tyre until the pressure reduces to the placard
• Once low pressure alert is set with tyre pressure lower than value
certain values then the alert shall not be cleared until the • The vehicle should be driven above 40 kmph for the new
pressure is filled to the placard value pressure value to be updated and the alert to be cleared

WHEELS AND TYRES
• Once the high pressure alert is triggered the alert shall not get shown in tiretronics screen when the vehicle is in running
cleared until the respective tyre pressure is reaches to the condition/ignition ON condition
certain value
• Once pressure leakage is observed the respective tyre should be
Pressure Leakage Alert observed for air leakages and the puncture condition has to be
rectified. Proper placard value should be filled after puncture
rectification
• If the vehicle is running in an extremely rocky and acute bumpy
condition then fluctuating pressure leakage alert may get set
which will get rectified when the vehicle runs back on a normal
road. This happens due to sudden change in pressure levels due
to rocky conditions
Auto Spare Tyre Swap
Pressure leakage monitoring is to indicate any pressure leakage in

any of the vehicle tyres. Please note the following points.
• The pressure leakage alert will be set only when the tyre
pressure is leaking at a rate
• In the pressure leakage condition if the tyre pressure goes too
low beyond the certain value then the low pressure alert will also
be set
• The pressure leakage alert in the main alert screen will pop up
Spare tyre swap feature monitors the spare tyre if it has been
once when the alert is set for driver notification and will be
swapped by the user for any faulty running tyre.

WHEELS AND TYRES
• If any one of the running tyres goes faulty, spare tyre is swapped Sensor Signal Missing Alert
with the running tyre and the vehicle is driven, then;
– the system automatically recognizes the swap
– interchanges the running tyre and spare tyre data
Always rectify the faulty tyre either in the spare tyre position or
the running tyre position.
• If the rectified running tyre is replaced back in to running location
and the spare tyre back in the spare position, then it is
mandatory that Tiretronics manual learning is performed post
the rectification
When the vehicle is running in speeds between 40 kmph and 120

The Tiretronics system cannot detect the absence/ missing kmph then the Tiretronics system should always keep receiving the
spare tyre. signals from all of the running tyres.
• On account of any issue in signal reception or Tiretronics sensor
damage or tyres changed with out performing manual learning
then the signal will not be received
• Under such condition if the vehicle was driven for more than
certain value without signal being received at least once, then
‘Signal missing’ will be set for respective tyre position on the
infotainment screen. The Tiretronics cluster telltale is also
illuminated to indicate the same.
• When the Tiretronics signal missing is set then perform manual
learning once. If manual learning is not done successfully then

WHEELS AND TYRES
the corresponding position tyres sensor needs to be checked by 1. Manual learning should be compulsorily performed on any of
carefully opening the tyre the following conditions or operations done
• If the sensor is found to be damaged then it should be replaced • Any sensors replaced.
with a new one and manual learning should be done
• Any of the tyres are replaced
Sensor Faulty/ Low Battery Alert
• If any of the tyres or set of tyres are shuffled or swapped in
The Tiretronics sensor in the vehicle tyres has an internal individual position
battery to each sensor fixed. If the battery level is too low or the
• If tyre rotation operation is performed
sensor by itself is malfunctioning then the Tiretronics system shall
give this alert. • If it is observed that the alert indications in the tiretronics
screen are not co-relating with respect to their actual
• If the Tiretronics sensor low battery/faulty is set then the
position in the vehicle
corresponding position tyres sensor needs to be removed by
carefully opening the tyre and replacing it with a new sensor 2. Once manual learning is initiated, the sensors inside the tyres
need to be triggered by leaking the air from each tyre one at a
• Post replacing the new sensor, manual learning should be done time and should be completed within certain value post to each
event for learning all 5 tyres
15.6.6 Tiretronics Learning 3. Do not perform Manual learning process at the same time on
two vehicles with in the radius of 20 meters
After tyre rotation or Tiretronics sensor replacement, the receiver 4. It is mandatory that manual learning of tyres should follow the
must be learnt, else the Tiretronics warning lamp indicates a sequence of ‘front left tyre position, front right tyre, rear right
malfunction. tyre, rear left tyre and spare tyre’
Mandate Points 5. It is required to ensure the tyres have pressure > 32psi and <
36psi before initiating the manual learning process
Manual learning is the process by which the identities of 5 sensors
installed inside the tyres are learnt and programmed in to the 6. Post manual learning, all tyres should be filled to the placard
memory of the receiver module. pressure value

WHEELS AND TYRES
It is mandatory that manual learning of tyres should follow the

sequence of ‘front left tyre position, front right tyre, rear right
tyre, rear left tyre and spare tyre’.
Initiating the Manual Learning Process
If failed to enter in to the manual learning mode;
3
• Try initiating the manual learning once again
2
1 • Check if the reverse gear is engaged, if it is engaged disengage it
• Check if the cluster mode button is working fine
1. Press the mode button (Up arrow) If problem still persist, contact an Authorized Mahindra Dealer for
further assistance.
2. Turn the ignition key on
3. Wait for the cluster’s tachometer and speedometer to rotate S t a r t i n g f r o m F r o n t L e f t T y r e : Start leaking the air from the front left
to highest position and then release the mode button. Then for 30 to 40 sec and stop for 5 sec. Repeat until the tyre gets
observe the cluster for the Tiretronics telltale to blink, vehicle learnt
siren will indicate by 3 chirps and infotainment screen shows If the front left tyre is learned, 1 siren chirp sound is heard and the
‘Tiretronics MANUAL LEARNING’ FL tyre shows learned in the infotainment system

WHEELS AND TYRES
L e a r n i n g t h e R e a r R i g h t T y r e : Start leaking the air from the rear

right for 30 to 40 sec and stop for 5 sec. Repeat until the tyre gets
learnt.
If the rear right tyre is learned, 1 siren chirp sound is heard and the
RR tyre shows learned in the infotainment system.
L e a r n i n g t h e F r o n t R i g h t T y r e : Start leaking the air from the front

right for 30 to 40 sec and stop for 5 sec. Repeat until the tyre gets
learnt.
If the front right tyre is learned, 1 siren chirp sound is heard and
the FR tyre shows learned in the infotainment system.
L e a r n i n g t h e R e a r L e f t T y r e : Start leaking the air from the rear left

tyre for 30 to 40 sec and stop for 5 sec. Repeat until the tyre gets
learnt.
If the rear left tyre is learned, 1 siren chirp sound is heard and the
RL tyre shows learned in the infotainment system.

WHEELS AND TYRES
C o m p l e t i n g t h e L e a r n i n g w i t h S p a r e T y r e : Start leaking the air from If learning is not successful at any point of time; or at any point of
the spare tyre for 30 to 40 sec and stop for 5 sec. Repeat until the time during the learning process if the learning takes more than 90
tyre gets learnt. secs of time for each tyre position then the system shall exit the
learning mode and show the ‘TIRETRONICS PROGRAM FAILURE
If the spare tyre is also learned, then 1 siren chirp is heard and ALL screen.
tyres show learned at respective tyre positions and ‘All tyres
Learned successfully’ in the centre of the screen.

WHEELS AND TYRES
Limitations 15.6.7 Tiretronics — Points to Remember

• The Tiretronics monitors only tyre pressure and temperature. It
• It is recommended to fill the pressure to 32 psi at a digital gauge
does not monitor conditions such as tyre wear
station only
• The Tiretronics will not be able to detect an instant tyre burst
• Every 15 days, inflate all the tyres up to 32 psi and inflation
and inform the driver in advance
should be done at cold condition/ambient temperature
• There may be the possibility of getting all the tyre location
• Pressure deviation between the Tiretronics display and gauge
indicators on the Tiretronics display blinking along with the
will depend upon the following factors:
Tiretronics telltale, on passing environment area prone to heavy
power lines and RF signal. It will come back to normal condition – Atmospheric pressure
whenever interference gets cleared
– Error in pressure filling gauge (not calibrated)
– Air leakage during inflation/deflation
Fault at spare position will be displayed after swapping or if the • Tiretronics measures the absolute pressure of the tyre, not
spare itself has a fault. If ‘spare tyre rectified’ is acknowledged relative pressure (gauge pressure)
without rectifying the fauIt, the Tiretronics cannot detect it. It is
• Pressure deviation is defined for 0.5 psi (min) and 3 psi (max)
the user’s responsibility to check the spare tyre before starting
the vehicle. • If the vehicle battery/fuse is disconnected and reconnected, it
will update the pressure after the vehicle is driven or sensor is
activated
• It is mandatory that manual learning should be performed if the
vehicle tyres are rotated or any of the tyres sensors are
replaced, else the system will give a false alert with respect to
false location
• At a time, only one tyre can be swapped with the spare wheel
and then follow the learning procedure

WHEELS AND TYRES
• If more than one tyre needs to be learned, learn all 5 tyres as

per manual learning procedure
• Tiretronics is only a warning or indicating device. Pressure and
temperature values displayed by the system is for indication
prior to alert purposes only. The Tiretronics system should not
be used as a measuring device to correlate or calibrate against
other systems
• During winter or in cold conditions, there may be chances of
getting a pressure alert with the corresponding tyre location
indicator in the display, if the tyre pressure is near the
thresholds level. i.e. between 28 psi to 24 psi. However, this alert
will get cleared after driving a few kilometers depending upon the
climatic condition

EMERGENCIES
16 EMERGENCIES • Panic Braking — When the vehicle is running above 100

kmph and panic/sudden brakes are applied, hazard will turn
16.1 Hazard Warning Lamp on for 10 sec
Pressing the hazard switch twice deactivates this feature.
The hazard warning lamp switch is located below the AC controls
on the instrument panel. Use the hazard warning lamp when your
vehicle is stationary or to warn other road users to be cautious 16.2 Vehicle Does not Start - Checks
while passing your vehicle.
Before making these checks, make sure you have followed the
To turn the hazard warning lamp ON, press the switch in. All the correct starting procedure and that you have sufficient fuel.
turn signal lamps flash. To turn OFF, press the switch again.
1 2
3
0 4 If the engine is not cranking or is cranking too slowly/ intermittently
A/C
1. Check that the battery terminals are tight and clean
2. If the battery terminals are firmly fastened, turn the interior
lamps ON
3. If the lamps do not illuminate, glow dim or go OFF when the
starter is cranked, the battery is weak or discharged. Try jump
starting. Follow ‘Jump starting’ instructions given later in this
chapter
4. Check the fuses in the Engine Compartment Fuse Box and
Central Fuse Box
If the engine cranks normally, but does not start
Hazard lamps are also switched ON during the following 1. If the lamp illumination is normal, engine is cranking normally,
conditions; but the engine does not start even after repeated cranking, it
needs adjustment or repair. Contact an Authorized Mahindra
• Crash — Hazard would be turned on for 30 mins Dealer

EMERGENCIES
2. During winter, use of non-winter diesel or due to extreme cold 16.3 Engine Overheating
conditions, the vehicle may not start. Contact an Authorized
Mahindra Dealer for further assistance If the temperature gauge bar in the instrument cluster is all the way
If the engine stalls while driving
up to the H and/or the high engine coolant temperature warning
lamp is ON, your engine has overheated.
Reduce your speed gradually, keeping a straight line. Move
cautiously off the road to a safe place. Turn ON your hazard warning If the engine is getting overheated, the Engine Management System
flashers and check for any malfunction lamps in the instrument reduces engine power substantially and may even shut the engine
cluster. Turn the ignition OFF, wait for approximately 90 sec and try OFF; it is dangerous to continue driving when the engine has
starting the engine again. If the vehicle still does not start contact overheated. You need to first cool the engine down before starting
an Authorized Mahindra Dealer. to drive again.
Follow the below instructions to cool the engine down
• Progressively reduce the vehicle speed and bring the vehicle to a
If the engine stalls while running, the power assist for the stop at the side of the road
brakes and steering will not work. Steering and braking will be
much harder than usual. • Turn ON the hazard warning flashers
If the engine speed does not increase • Keep the engine running at idle
If the engine speed does not increase when the accelerator pedal is • Engage the parking brake
depressed, there may be a problem in the Engine Management • Switch off the air conditioner
System, electrical or electronic controls. In case of certain faults,
the engine may go to limp home mode, which is indicated by the • Wait till the engine coolant temperature drops sufficiently such
check engine lamp. Have your vehicle checked by an Authorized that the needle in the temperature gauge is around halfway
Mahindra Dealer as soon as possible. between C and H
Now switch the engine OFF and carefully open the bonnet/hood to
visually inspect the engine cooling system parts. Be cautious while
doing an inspection as vehicle parts will still be too hot. Verify that
the engine coolant level in the coolant recovery tank is maintained

EMERGENCIES
between the 'Min' and 'Max' mark. Check for possible fluid leakages. pressure cap of the degassing tank when the engine is hot. Not
Check for damages to heat exchangers and connecting hoses. Also taking precautions may lead to serious injury to your skin/eyes.
verify that the radiator shrouds, engine fan blades and the engine
belt all are in good condition.
If any evidence of failure is observed, contact the nearest For optimum performance of the cooling system you must
Authorized Mahindra Dealer for help. In case, no system leakage/ maintain the required coolant level and use only recommended
failure is suspected, driving can be continued. engine coolant.
Either due to severe operating conditions or due to any system
leakages or failures, the engine can get overheated. However if the 16.4 Jump Starting
engine is getting overheated repeatedly, even in normal operating
conditions, get the vehicle checked by an Authorized Mahindra If your vehicle's battery has run down, you may be able to start the
Dealer as soon as possible. engine by using a standalone booster battery.
But before going ahead with this procedure ensure that the battery
is the cause of vehicle not starting. To confirm this, few simple tests
Refer to the 'High Engine Coolant Temperature' section under can be conducted as follows;
the 'Features and Control' chapter for details. • C h e c k t h e h e a d l i g h t s - Are they dim or bright? If they are dim, it's
likely your battery is dead. If your headlights are bright, you do not
have a dead battery and a jump start may not help
If the high engine coolant temperature warning is ignored, the • T r y t o s t a r t y o u r v e h i c l e - Does it turn over very slowly, or does it
engine shuts OFF abruptly to safeguard engine components crank quickly? If it cranks quickly, you do not have a dead battery
from overheating and consequent failure. Abrupt engine shut- and a jump start may not help. If it cranks slowly, or not at all, you
off can lead to uncontrollable driving condition and accidents. probably have a dead battery
Stay clear of hot and rotating vehicle parts while visually
Open the bonnet and locate the battery (near the left side fender).
inspecting the vehicle. The coolant inside the cooling system is
Identify the positive and negative terminals.
under high pressure and temperature. Never open the

EMERGENCIES
• The positive terminal will be marked with a plus sign (+) and will cables and terminals. Use a stiff wire brush to remove all
usually have a R E D cable attached on it. corrosion. Reconnect the cables to the battery terminals
and jump the vehicle.
• The negative terminal will be marked with a minus sign (-) and will
usually have a B L A C K cable attached to it 2. Untangle and unwind your jumper cables. Like your batteries,
your jumper cables will probably have red and black cables and
Check the physical condition of the battery. Inspect batteries for will have heavy duty clamps to connect to the battery
cracks, leaks or any other damage. If you find any of these things, do terminals. You must make sure that the red and black ends of
not jump start the vehicle. Call Mahindra Road Side Assistance or your jumper cables never touch each other once they are
replace the battery. If the weather is very cold, remove the refill connected to the batteries; permitting them to do so can
caps and check the condition of the electrolyte. If it seems slushy or result in serious arcing and/or damage to vehicle
like ice, do not attempt jump-starting until it thaws.
3. Connect the jumper cables in the order described below;
1. Wear safety gear (goggles or face guard and gloves) if you
have it. • Connect one red clamp of the jumper cable to the positive
(+) terminal of the discharged battery
• Connect other end of the red clamp to the positive (+)
terminal of the booster battery
• Connect one black clamp of the jumper cable to the
negative (-) terminal of the booster battery
• Connect the other end of the black clamp to the negative (-)
terminal of the discharged battery
• Crank the engine for starting
• Once the vehicle gets started, carefully remove the jumper
cables in the reverse order of attachment
It may be necessary to remove the disabled vehicle’s
battery cables from the battery terminals and clean both

EMERGENCIES
Booster • Disconnect the other end of the red clamp from the positive
Battery
(+) terminal of the discharged battery
Replace positive (+) red post protective covers if applicable
(You have had to remove or open these in the beginning)
These covers help prevent accidental short circuiting of the
battery
Positive (Red)
5. Keep the recently-disabled vehicle's engine running. Run the
Discharged
Battery
Negative (Black)
vehicle above idle (slightly revved up with your foot on the
W12M04
accelerator). This should give the battery enough charge to
start the vehicle again. If it does not, you probably have a dead
battery or a dying alternator
Make sure none of the cables are dangling into the engine
compartment, where they could be exposed to moving
parts. Improper jump starting procedures can result in battery
4. Remove the jumper cables once the vehicle starts. Do this in explosion and acid burn hazard.
the reverse of the order in which they were attached, and don't Loosely connected battery cables could damage the electronic
let any of the cables or clamps touch each other (or dangle control units.
into the engine compartment)
To disconnect battery terminals wait for at least 2 minutes to
• Disconnect the black clamp of the jumper cable from the allow discharge of high voltage or it could lead to personal
negative (-) terminal of the discharged battery injury.
• Disconnect the other end of the black clamp from the While disconnecting, always disconnect the -VE terminal first
negative (-) terminal of the booster battery and while connecting, always connect the -VE terminal last.
• Disconnect the red clamp of the jumper cable from the Do not connect battery terminals with opposite polarity, it will
positive (+) terminal of the booster battery lead to alternator failure

EMERGENCIES
Towing a vehicle to start could be dangerous. The vehicle being

towed could surge forward when the engine starts, causing the
tow vehicles to collide, injuring the occupants.
Modern vehicles with electronic management systems should
not be jump started without ‘protected’ jump starter leads.
16.5 Towing
16.5.1 Towing Equipment

Towing equipment are of two types.
• Flat-bed equipment - Your vehicle is loaded on the back of a
truck. This is the safest and best way of towing.
• Rear-lift equipment - The tow truck uses two pivoting arms that
go under the tires (front or rear) and lift them off the ground.
The other two tires remain on the ground.
• Sling-type equipment - The tow truck uses metal cables with
hooks on both ends. These hooks go around parts of the frame
or suspension and lift the end of the vehicle off the ground. This
is not a good method of towing as it may damage the vehicle's
suspension and body. Avoid a tow with sling type equipment

EMERGENCIES
Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle
Variants Wheels OFF the

Towing Option Towing Condition Four - Wheel Drive Models
(All) Ground
� On Trailer ALL OK
Flat Bed Towing
✗ Flat Tow NONE NOT ALLOWED
Flat Towing
Sling Type Towing (Front Wheel Lift)

✗ Front NOT ALLOWED
Dolly Tow
✗ REAR NOT ALLOWED
Rear Lift (Rear Wheel Lift)

EMERGENCIES
If your vehicle needs to be towed, call a professional towing service.

If a towing service is unavailable in an emergency, your vehicle may
When towing your vehicle, always follow applicable state and be temporarily towed by a cable or chain secured to the emergency
provincial laws. Contact state and provincial Highway Safety welded towing hook into the front and Rear.
offices for additional details.
Remove/Prise out the tow hook cover in the front and Rear
bumper using a screwdriver. Fasten a cable or chain specifically
16.5.2 Towing your Vehicle During Emergency intended for use in towing vehicles to the towing hook.
Use only the towing hook provided, for towing in an emergency.

Do not tow by the bumper or any other part which may be
damaged.
Use only the cable or chain specifically intended for use in
towing vehicles.
A driver must be in the vehicle being towed to steer and
operate the brakes. Towing in this manner must be done only
on hard-surfaced roads for short distances and at low speeds.
Also, the wheels, axles, drive train, steering and brakes must all
be in good working condition.
Avoid sudden starts or erratic driving maneuvers, which would
place excessive stress on the towing hook and towing cable or
chain, resulting in breakage of the hook or the chain.
If the engine is not running, the power assist for the steering
and brakes will not be functional, making it harder to steer or
brake than usual.

EMERGENCIES
When lifting the rear wheels, take care to ensure adequate

ground clearance for towing at the front end of the raised
vehicle. The bumper and/or underbody of the vehicle may be
damaged during towing.
16.6 Limp Home Mode

Limp home mode is an emergency situation declared by the EMS
(Engine Management System) due to failure of one/more critical
sensors/actuators. In this mode, the EMS (Engine Management
System) will revert back to basic minimum requirement (fuel
quantity / injection timings) to aid the driver to bring the vehicle
back to the nearest workshop. Needless to say the drivability & fuel
consumption will be greatly affected.
If vehicle acceleration worsens or if there is a drop in vehicle
performance, there might be a malfunction in the engine
management system which triggers/activates the Limp Home
Mode. This condition is accompanied by the check engine lamp
illuminating in the instrument cluster. In this mode, the vehicle
speed is limited and the accelerator pedal may not function
normally. It is recommended you contact an Authorized Mahindra
Dealer immediately for assistance.

MAINTENANCE
17 MAINTENANCE Get the most from your vehicle with routine maintenance
Routine maintenance is the best way to help ensure you get the
17.1 General Owners Information
performance, dependability, long life and better resale value you
expect from your vehicle. This is exactly why we've put together this
Your vehicle has been designed for fewer maintenance
Maintenance Section. It outlines the services required to properly
requirements with longer service intervals to save both your time
maintain your vehicle and when they should be performed. The
and money. However, each regular maintenance, as well as day-to-
focus is on maintaining your vehicle while it's running great, which
day care is more important to ensure a smooth, trouble free, safe
goes a long way toward preventing major repairs and expenses
and economical operation.
later.
It is the owner's responsibility to make sure the specified
Here are a few suggestions to help you get started on routine
maintenance, including general maintenance service is performed.
maintenance:
Note that both the new vehicle limited warranty and emission
control system limited warranties specify that proper maintenance • Familiarize yourself with your vehicle by going through your
and care must be performed. See Service Coupon Booklet for Owner's Manual
complete warranty information.
• Take a few minutes to review this Maintenance Section
Where to go for service?
• Make it a habit to use this manual to record scheduled
Mahindra technicians are well trained specialists and are kept up to maintenance in the Service Coupon Booklet
date with the latest service information through technical bulletins, • Consult with your Authorized Mahindra Dealer for all your
service tips and in dealership training programs. They learn to work vehicle's needs
on Mahindra vehicles before they work on your vehicle, rather than
while they are working on it.
You can be confident that your Mahindra dealer's service
department does the best job to meet the maintenance
requirements on your vehicle reliably and economically.

MAINTENANCE
17.1.1 Suggestions for Obtaining Service for your If an Authorized Mahindra Dealership is unable to resolve the
Vehicle concern, you may contact any Mahindra Customer Care executive.
They would need the following information:
Prepare for the Appointment
Owner's name and address, owner's telephone number (home and
If you have warranty work to be done, be sure to have the right office), Authorized Dealership name, Vehicle Identification Number
papers with you. All work to be performed may not be covered by (VIN), vehicle delivery date and mileage.
the warranty. Discuss additional charges with the service manager.
Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle's service history.
17.1.3 Warranty Information
Prepare a List
Read the Warranty Information given in the ‘ W a r r a n t y I n f o r m a t i o n
Make a written list of your vehicle's problems or the specific work & M a i n t e n a n c e G u i d e ’ for the terms and provisions of Mahindra
you want done. If you've had an accident or work done that is not on warranties applicable to this vehicle. Mahindra genuine parts, fluids,
your maintenance log, let the service advisor know about it. lubricants and accessories are available at any Authorized
Mahindra Dealer. They will help keep the vehicle operating at its
Be Reasonable with Requests
best.
If you list a number of items and you must have your vehicle by the
end of the day, discuss the situation with the service advisor and list 17.1.4 Protect your Warranty
the items in order of priority.
Routine maintenance is not only the best way to help keep your
17.1.2 Need Assistance? vehicle performing as intended, it's also the best way to protect
your warranty. Failure to perform scheduled maintenance specified
It is recommended talking to an Authorized Mahindra Dealer in the Service Coupon Booklet will invalidate warranty coverage on
service manager first. Most matters can be resolved with this parts affected by the lack of maintenance. We can't stress enough
process. If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the how important it is to keep records of all maintenance. Damage or
general manager or owner of the dealership. failures due to neglect or lack of proper maintenance are not
covered under warranty.

MAINTENANCE
Keeping m a i n t e n a n c e r e c o r d s is easy with the service coupon contamination should be inspected immediately by a qualified expert
booklet such as the factory trained technicians at your Authorized
Mahindra Dealer. Your vehicle's oils and fluids should be changed at
It's important to document the maintenance of your vehicle. For the specified intervals or in conjunction with a repair.
your convenience to maintain records of service, the scheduled
maintenance coupons are provided in the service coupon booklet.
Every time you bring your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance, be 17.1.7 Chemicals and Additives
sure to present this booklet and certify the work. Also record the
date of service and mileage at the time of service. This will make Non-Mahindra approved chemicals or additives are not required for
record keeping easy and, should your vehicle ever require warranty factory recommended maintenance. In fact, Mahindra
coverage, you will have all the documentation to show you've recommends against the use of such additive products unless
properly maintained it. specifically recommended by Mahindra for a particular application.
Your vehicle is very sophisticated and built with multiple complex
17.1.5 Maintenance Interval performance systems. Every manufacturer develops these systems
using different specifications and performance features. That's why
Mahindra establishes recommended maintenance intervals based it's important to rely on your Authorized Mahindra Dealer to
upon engineering testing to determine the most appropriate properly diagnose and repair your vehicle.
mileage to perform the various maintenance services. This protects
your vehicle at the lowest overall cost to you. Mahindra When planning your maintenance services, consider your
recommends that you do not deviate from the maintenance Authorized Mahindra Dealer for all your vehicle's needs.
schedules presented in this Maintenance Schedule.
17.1.8 Get the most from your service and maintenance
17.1.6 Oils, Fluids and Flushing visits
In many cases, fluid discoloration is a normal operating Getting your vehicle serviced at an Authorized Mahindra Dealer
characteristic by itself, and does not necessarily indicate a concern adds great value to your vehicle in number of ways. Hence, it is
or that the fluid needs to be changed. However, discolored fluids recommended to service your vehicle at an Authorized Mahindra
that also show signs of overheating and/or foreign material Dealer only.

MAINTENANCE
17.1.9 Vehicle Self Maintenance - General Precautions 17.2 Opening/Closing the Hood
• Refer to relevant sections of the manual before starting The hood release lever is located in the driver side foot well area
below the instrument panel.
• Set the parking brake
• Block the wheels to prevent the vehicle from moving
unexpectedly
• Turn OFF the engine and remove the key
• Stay clear of hot vehicle parts
• Avoid repeated contact with fluids
• Do not let fuel, coolant and other fluids spill over electrical and
hot vehicle parts
• Keep all open flames and other burning material like cigarettes
away from the battery and all fuel related parts To open the hood, follow the steps as shown below;
Do not start/run the engine when any engine/peripheral parts

are removed.

MAINTENANCE
• Do not open the hood immediately after a drive; the engine

compartment will be very hot
• Always double check to be sure that the hood is firmly
latched before driving away. If it is not latched properly, the
hood could open while the vehicle is being driven, causing a
total loss of visibility, resulting in an accident
• Do not move the vehicle with the hood in the raised position,
1. Pull the catcher locks from the hood mounting bracket to as vision is obstructed
release the hood as shown in the image
2. Lift the hood.
3. Support the hood by the stay rod Parking of Engine Hood on Windshield is not recommended and
may damage Windshield frame, Glass and Hood.
Park the Engine Hood with Stay rod.
Follow the below steps to close the hood;
1. Remove the stay rod from the hood panel and place it in the
retaining clip.
2. Lower the hood slowly and allow it to fall by its own weight.
3. Firmly press the catcher locks in the hood mounting bracket.
This ensures that locks the hood in its fully closed position

MAINTENANCE
17.3 Identifying Components in the Engine Compartment - Diesel

MAINTENANCE
A Brake/Clutch Fluid Reservoir F Power Steering Fluid Reservoir
B Air intake G Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir
C Engine Oil Cap H Engine Compartment Fuse Box
D Degassing Tank (Coolant Filling) I Battery
E Dipstick

MAINTENANCE
Identifying Components in the Engine Compartment - Petrol
A B C D E F G H I

MAINTENANCE
A Brake/Clutch Fluid Reservoir F Power Steering Fluid Reservoir
B Air intake G Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir
C Dipstick H Engine Compartment Fuse Box
D Engine Oil Cap I Battery
E Degassing Tank (Coolant Filling)
Maintenance is classified as below;

• General Maintenance
• Scheduled Maintenance
17.4 General Maintenance

Make these checks only with adequate ventilation if you intend
to run the engine.
Exercise extreme caution when the hood is open and engine is
ON. In the Engine Compartment
• Front windshield washer fluid level
Listed below are the general maintenance items that should be
performed frequently. In addition to checking the items listed below, • Engine coolant level
if you notice any unusual noise, fluid leakages, smell or vibration, you
• Battery condition
should investigate the cause or take your vehicle to your Authorized
Mahindra Dealer or a qualified service shop immediately. • Brake/Clutch fluid level
• Engine oil level

MAINTENANCE
• Power steering fluid level • Tire inflation pressure

• Fluid leaks • Tire surface/thread and wheel nuts
• Hoses, joints and pipes for any abnormalities
Inside the Vehicle 17.5 In the Engine Compartment
• Lights 17.5.1 Fluid Leaks
• Warning lamps
Check the engine compartment and the underbody of the vehicle
• Windshield wipe and wash for any leaks. If you smell fuel vapor or notice any leak, Get the
cause found and corrected immediately.
• Steering wheel
• Seats
17.5.2 Engine Oil
• Seat belts
Engine oil has the primary function of lubricating and cooling the
• Accelerator pedal
inside of the engine. It plays a major role in maintaining the engine
• Brake pedal in proper working order. Therefore, it is essential to check the
engine oil regularly.
• Brakes
• Parking brake 17.5.3 Engine Oil Consumption
• Gear lever shift mechanism
It is normal for engines to consume some engine oil during
Outside the Vehicle
operation.
• Lamps
Causes of consumption in a normal engine are as follows;
• Fluid leaks
• Oil is used to lubricate pistons, piston rings and cylinders. Thin
• Doors and engine hood latches films of oil, left over when pistons move in cylinders, are sucked

MAINTENANCE
into the combustion chamber due to high negative pressure

Diesel Petrol
generated when the vehicle is decelerating. This oil gets burnt in
the combustion chamber
• Oil is also used to lubricate the stems of intake valves. Some of
this oil is sucked into the combustion chamber together with the
intake air and is burnt there
• Engine oil consumption depends upon the viscosity and quality of
the oil, and upon the conditions in which the vehicle is driven. Oil
consumption will be more due to high speed driving and frequent
acceleration and deceleration. A new engine may consume more
oil since its pistons, piston rings and cylinder walls are not
conditioned • Wipe the dipstick with a clean cloth. Insert the dipstick fully, then
remove it again
17.5.4 Checking/Topping the Engine Oil • If the oil level is between ‘M i n ’and ‘M a x ’marks, the oil level is
acceptable. D O N O T A D D O I L
• Make sure the vehicle is on level ground • If the oil level is below the ‘Min’ mark, add enough oil through the
• Turn the engine OFF and wait a few minutes for the oil to settle oil filler neck to raise the level within the ‘Min’ and ‘Max’ marks.
down into the oil sump Wait for a few minutes after every top up for the oil to settle
down before checking the level.
• Apply the parking brake
• Open the hood. Protect yourself from engine heat
• Locate and carefully remove the engine oil level dipstick

MAINTENANCE
17.5.5 Checking/Topping Engine Coolant Level
• Park the vehicle on a flat-horizontal surface. Keep the parking

brake fully engaged. Shut-off the engine
MAX
• Oil levels above the ‘Max’ mark may cause engine damage/poor MIN
performance.
• Put the dipstick and the oil filler cap back and ensure it is fully/
properly seated.
• Wait till the engine cools down and hence coolant temperature
comes down to normal room temperature
To avoid possible oil loss and injury due to hot blow-by gas, D O • The coolant level should be between ‘MIN’ and ‘MAX’ marking
N O T operate the vehicle with the engine oil level dipstick and/or provided on the coolant recovery tank
the engine oil filler cap removed.
• In case the coolant level is below the ‘MIN’ marking, the coolant
should be topped-up
Draining/Changing of engine oil should always be done by an • The coolant should be filled till the level rises above the ‘MIN’ but
Authorized Mahindra Dealer. remain below the ‘MAX’ marking on the coolant recovery tank
• However if the Coolant Recovery Tank is found to be near empty,
it is recommended that the system be checked at an Authorized
Mahindra Dealer

MAINTENANCE
17.5.6 Checking/Topping Brake/Clutch Fluid

Never open the pressure cap when the engine is hot. Hot
coolant may splash resulting in serious personal injury or
severe burns by the erupting liquid.
Top up only with recommended Ready-To-Use (RTU) coolants MA

X
for ensuring performance, anti-freezing and corrosion
protection. Do not add water directly. Mixing with other brands MI
N
of coolant is not recommended and should be avoided.
The brake system is supplied with brake fluid from the brake fluid
Draining or changing of engine coolant should always be done reservoir located adjacent to the air filter.
by an Authorized Mahindra Dealer.
The brake fluid level will drop slowly as the brakes wear, and will rise
when the brake components are replaced. Fluid levels between the
‘MIN’ and ‘MAX’ lines are within the normal operating range; there
is no need to add fluid. If the fluid levels are below the ‘MIN’ mark,
the performance of the systems could be compromised; the brake/
clutch operation could be spongy and gear change harder.
Top-up the recommended brake/clutch fluid till the ‘MAX’ mark or
contact an Authorized Mahindra Dealer immediately.
Carefully clean the cap on the reservoir before you remove it and be
sure no debris fall in the reservoir. Do not keep the reservoir open
for longer than necessary to add brake fluid.

MAINTENANCE
Use only brake/clutch fluid that meets Mahindra specifications. 17.5.7 Fuel Filter Water Draining (If equipped)
Refer to the ‘Lubricant and Capacities’ section.
The light may flash momentarily during sharp cornering

maneuvers, which change fluid level conditions. The vehicle
should have service performed, and the brake fluid level
checked.
If brake / clutch failure is noticed, immediate repair is must
If the vehicle not moved for long time, Clutch plate and Brake
Liners can tend to be sticking to the Flywheel/Disc/Drum,
depending on the Humidity and Temperature etc., As a good
practice, if the vehicle parked for a longer time, We suggest for
the following actions once in 15 days.
• Release the parking brake
• Start the engine
• Move the vehicle back and forth
This will also ensure that the engine is run, Battery remain
The fuel filter needs to be drained when there is water entry in the
charged. Also avoid tyre developing flat spot.
fuel filter. Follow the below procedure to drain the water;
1. Park the vehicle on a level ground
2. Apply Parking brake and block the wheels.

MAINTENANCE
3. Switch the ignition OFF 17.5.8 Checking/Topping Power Steering Fluid

4. Turn the drain plug (Tool is available in the tool kit) anti-
clockwise 3–4 rounds, but DO NOT remove the plug Check the power steering fluid level at the defined service intervals.
Refer to Maintenance Chart for details.
5. Wait till the water drains (few seconds)
6. Turn the drain plug clockwise to close and tighten the plug The fluid level should be checked if a leak is suspected, abnormal
firmly noises are apparent, and/or the system is not functioning as
anticipated. Coordinate inspection efforts through an Authorized
Mahindra Dealer.
Driving a vehicle with power steering fluid below the minimum

mark will damage steering system.
Use only recommended power steering fluid. Do not use other
types of power steering fluids which may damage the power
steering system.

MAINTENANCE
17.5.9 Windshield Washer Fluid Top-up

The fluid level in the reservoir should be checked on a level
surface with the engine OFF to prevent injury from moving parts
and to ensure accurate fluid level reading.
Follow the below steps for checking and topping up the power
steering fluid;
1. Start the engine and let it run until it reaches normal operating
temperature
2. While the engine idles, turn the steering wheel left and right a
couple of times
3. Turn the engine OFF Top up the windshield washer reservoir as and when required. The
4. Check the power steering fluid level in the reservoir fluid reservoir is located on the RHS of the engine bay behind the
head lamp. The reservoir supplies washer fluid to both front and
5. The fluid level should be maintained between the ‘ M I N ’ and rear (if equipped).
‘ M A X ’ marks on the dipstick, integrated with the cap
6. If the fluid is low, add fluid in small amounts, continuously In very cold weather conditions, fill the reservoir with washer fluid
checking the level until it reaches the correct operating range. premixed with anti-freeze.
Be sure to put the cap back on the reservoir
7. With a clean cloth, wipe any spilled fluid from all surfaces
If you operate your vehicle in temperatures below 4.5ºC, use
washer fluid with anti-freeze protection. Failure to use washer
fluid with anti-freeze protection in cold weather could result in
Changing of power steering fluid should always be done by an impaired windshield vision and increase the risk of injury or
Authorized Mahindra Dealer. accident.

MAINTENANCE
17.5.10 Checking the Wiper Blades 2. Press the retaining clip in the opposite direction, disengage the
wiper blade and pull it off the arm
Lift the wiper arm from its position. Expose the blade lip for To prevent damage to the windshield, don’t let the wiper arm
inspection. Clean the wiper blade lips with water applied with a soft slap down on to it.
sponge. If the wiper blade is not wiping the glass satisfactorily or is
worn-out, cut, cracked or bulging get it replaced at an Authorized 3. Hold the end of the rubber and pull until the tabs are free of
Mahindra Dealer. the metal support
4. Carefully insert the new blade rubber. Then install the blade
assembly in the reverse order of removal
17.5.11 Changing the Wiper Blade
1. Lift the arm and position the wiper blade at right angles to the
wiper arm

MAINTENANCE
17.6 Maintenance - Inside the Vehicle 17.6.5 Accelerator Pedal
17.6.1 Lights Check the pedal for smooth operation, uneven pedal effort or
stickiness. Check the foot well and remove obstructions if any.
Make sure the headlights, stop lights, tail lights, turn signal lights
and other lights are all working. Check headlight aim.
17.6.6 Brake Pedal
17.6.2 Warning Messages and Lamps Check the pedal for smooth operation and proper clearance. Check
the foot well and remove obstructions if any.
Check all warning lamps appearing in the instrument cluster and
Infotainment. Refer to the relevant sections in this manual for
17.7 Maintenance - Outside the Vehicle
further details.
The following checks should be carried out from time to time,
17.6.3 Seats unless otherwise specified.
Check that all seat controls such as seat adjusters, seat back
recliner, etc. operate smoothly and that all latches lock securely in
17.7.1 Lamps
any position. Check that the head restraints move up and down
Check and ensure proper functioning of all exterior lamps.
smoothly and that the locks hold securely in any latched position.
17.7.2 Fluid Leaks

17.6.4 Seat Belts
Check the engine compartment and the underbody of the vehicle
Check that the seat belt system such as buckles, retractors and
for any leaks. If you smell fuel vapor or notice any leak, get the cause
anchors operate properly and smoothly. Make sure the belt
found and corrected immediately.
webbing is not cut, frayed, worn or damaged.

MAINTENANCE
17.7.3 Doors and Engine Hood 17.8.1 For Best Battery Service
Check all doors and latches including the tailgate for proper • Keep the battery securely mounted
functioning. Make sure the engine hood secondary latch secures
the hood from opening when the primary latch is released. • Keep the battery top clean and dry
• Keep the terminals and connections clean, tight and coated with
petroleum jelly or terminal grease
17.7.4 Tyre Inflation Pressure
• Rinse any spilled electrolyte from the battery immediately with a
Check the tire pressure with a pressure gauge every week. solution of water and baking soda
17.8 Battery
Do not disconnect battery terminals while the engine is running.
Your vehicle is equipped with a Mahindra genuine battery. For This will adversely affect all electronic controllers.
longer, trouble-free operation, keep the top of the battery clean and
dry. Also, make certain the battery cables are always tightly
fastened to the battery terminals.
While removing the battery, always disconnect the negative
If you see any corrosion on the battery or terminals, remove the terminal first. And while installing the battery, ensure the
cables from the terminals and clean with a wire brush. To prevent negative terminal is connected last.
corrosion, apply petroleum jelly to the battery terminals. Tighten
loose terminals and hold down clamp nuts only enough to keep the It is recommended that the negative battery cable terminal be
battery firmly in place. Tightening excessively may damage the disconnected from the battery if you plan to store your vehicle for
battery terminals. an extended period of time. This will minimize the discharge of your
battery during storage.
Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution; do not allow battery

acid to contact eyes, skin or clothing. Don't lean over battery

MAINTENANCE
when attaching clamps or allow the clamps to touch each 17.9 Appearance Care and Protection
other. If acid splashes in the eyes or on the skin, flush
contaminated area immediately with large quantities of water. 17.9.1 Washing the Exterior
A battery generates hydrogen gas which is flammable and
explosive. Keep any flame or spark away from the vent holes. • Wash your vehicle regularly with cool or lukewarm water and a
neutral pH soap
Keep batteries out of reach of children. Battery posts,
terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead • Never use strong household detergents or soap, such as dish
components. Wash hands after handling batteries. washing or laundry liquid. These products can discolor and spot
If the battery has been disconnected or a new battery has been painted surfaces
installed, the clock (if equipped) and the preset radio (if • Never wash a vehicle that is ‘hot to the touch’ or during
equipped) stations must be reset once the battery is exposure to strong, direct sunlight
reconnected.
• Always use a clean sponge or car wash mitt with plenty of water
The replacement battery must meet the specification of the for best results
originally fitted battery.
• Dry the vehicle with a chamois or soft terry cloth towel in order
to eliminate water spotting
17.8.2 Checking the Electrolyte Level
• It is especially important to wash the vehicle regularly during the
Check the electrolyte level and specific gravity at intervals of three winter months, as dirt and road salt are difficult to remove and
months. Check all the six cells for proper electrolyte levels. If the cause damage to the vehicle
level is below the lower marker, add distilled water until the level • Immediately remove items such as gasoline, diesel fuel, bird
reaches the upper marker. droppings and insect deposits; they can cause damage to the
Adding distilled water; vehicle's paint work and trim over time
• Remove the vent plugs

• Add distilled water to all the cells that require the fluid and
secure the plugs properly

MAINTENANCE
17.9.2 Engine Compartment

Do not wash the engine or engine compartment or underbody
with pressurized water.
17.9.3 Exterior Chrome

• Wash the vehicle first, using cool or lukewarm water and a
neutral pH shampoo
• Use the custom bright metal cleaners, available at your
Authorized Mahindra Dealer. Apply the product as you would wax
to clean chrome parts; allow the cleaner to dry for a few
minutes, and then wipe off the haze with a clean, dry rag
• Never use abrasive materials such as steel wool or plastic pads
as they can leave scratches on the chrome surface
• After polishing the chrome parts, you can also apply a coating of
Premium Liquid Wax, available at your Authorized Mahindra
Dealer, or an equivalent quality product to help protect from
environmental effects

MAINTENANCE
17.9.4 Precautions while Washing Convertible Top A-Pillar Zone
• The Seal is robust enough to seal the gap between the

Convertible top and Body to avoid the water entry, yet soft
enough to compress against the canopy top with ease (less
efforts for latching front bow)
• High pressure water jet directed towards it may damage seal
allowing the water leakage.
W52H72

MAINTENANCE
• High pressure water jet directed towards the front bow seal may • High pressure water jet directed on the side window corners
result in compressing the seal and hence may lead to leakage. may enter through the Velcro flaps and seep inside the vehicle..
• High pressure water jet should not be directed towards the • High pressure water jet should not be directed towards the
areas as shown. corner areas as shown.
Front Bow Area B-Pillar Zone
S22H346
W52H74

MAINTENANCE
• High pressure water jet directed above the side door may enter • The rear Zip ends are backed by a flap to avoid the water entry.
through the Velcro flaps and seep inside the vehicle However the high-pressure jet may displace the flap causing
leakage at the corners.
• High pressure water jet should not be directed towards the
areas as indicated in picture. • High pressure water jet should not be directed towards these
corners to avoid any possible water entry into vehicle.
Door top rail area
Rear Zip Area
W52H75 W52H76

MAINTENANCE
Do’s & Dont’s for Canopy Top Usage:

• Always keep your vehicle canopy top in close condition when
unattended to avoid direct exposure to Sun/Rain which may • Not following above guidelines may cause interior damage,
damage your Interior parts. stains or spotting on the canopy fabric material
• Always use only approved products to clean fabric parts. These • Avoid automatic car washes, as they can damage the fabric.
products are available with your Authorised Mahindra Dealer. • Careless handling and storage of the fabric roof top may
• Always use soft water to clean fabric to avoid whitening marks. damage the parts, resulting into the malfunction and tearing
if in close contact to any sharp objects.
• Do not bleach or wash with concentrated cleaning materials
which may damage the fabric. • While installation & removal of fabric top always follow
standard operating procedure to avoid water leakage, air
• Be careful while washing the clear windows by following the leakage & dust ingress.
directions.
• Do not use high pressure jet with narrow spray angle. Use
1. Use approved Mahindra cleaning solutions/ 3M ALL the nozzle with wider spray angle for washing.
PURPOSE CLEANER only for washing.
2. Dry with lint free microfiber cloth. Narrow Spray Angle Wider Spray Angle
3. Don’t use a dry cloth to remove dust on clear windows else

it may lead to haziness & scratches.
• After cleaning your vehicle’s fabric top, always make sure it is
completely dry before operating else it may allow water to drip
into the vehicle’s interior. W52R25 W52R26
• Care to be taken while storing the detachable windows to avoid

scratch marks, folding, tearing & losing sheen.
Avoid directing high pressure water jet on to the indicated
areas

MAINTENANCE
17.9.5 Precautions while Washing Hard Top A-Piller Zone

Avoid directing high pressure water jet to the seal around the A-
Pillar as highlighted in the image. This may damage the seal
allowing the water leakage.
The Seal is robust enough to seal the gap

between the hardtop and body to avoid the water entry,
yet soft enough to compress against the Hardtop
W52R27

MAINTENANCE
Avoid directing high pressure water jet the front bow seal, else it Avoid directing high pressure water jet on the joineries, else it may
may result in compressing the seal and hence may lead to leakage. lead to damage of joinery and allow seepage of water inside the
vehicle.
W52R28
W52R29

MAINTENANCE
Avoid directing high pressure water jet above the side door, else it Avoid directing high pressure water jet on the D-pillar joinery, else it
may lead to damage of joinery/seal and allow seepage of water may lead to damage of joinery/seal and allow seepage of water
inside the vehicle. inside the vehicle.
W52R30 W52R31

MAINTENANCE
Avoid directing high pressure water jet on the tailgate to glass

joinery, else it may lead to damage of joinery/seal and allow
seepage of water inside the vehicle.
Rear glass is backed with edge seal to avoid

the water entry. However, the high-pressure jet may
displace the lip causing leakage
W52R32

MAINTENANCE
Avoid directing high pressure water jet on the Front roof to Rear Do’s & Dont’s for Canopy Top Usage:
roof joinery & Rear roof to Rear Panel joinery, else it may lead to
• Always use only the approved products to clean Hardtop
damage of joinery/seal and allow seepage of water inside the
plastics.
vehicle.
• Always use soft water to clean Hardtop to avoid whitening
marks.
• Do not bleach or wash with concentrated cleaning materials
which may damage the Hardtop.
• Be careful while washing the Quarter Glass of the Hardtop,
ensure to adhere to the following.
1. Using the approved Mahindra cleaning solutions.
2. Using a clean cloth to remove dust on Quarter Glass else
it may lead to haziness & scratches on it.
• After cleaning Hardtop, always ensure it is completely dry before
operating. Otherwise it may allow water to drip in to the vehicle
through the joineries.
• Removal and Refitment of Hardtop must be done with the help of
a Trained Technician only, not recommended to be removed/
refitted by the customer.
• Do not store detached Hardtop in open/ sunlight/ rain etc. as it
might damage the interiors. Care should be taken while storing
the detached Hardtop so that:
W52R33 1. To avoid scratch marks, rubbing, and damage due to
hazardous liquids / acids.

MAINTENANCE
2. To avoid damage to the external bolts or nuts of the 17.9.6 Paint Chips
Hardtop.
• Mahindra dealers have the exact touch-up paint to match your
3. To avoid damage/misplacement for the removed
vehicle's color
fasteners.
• Take your vehicle to an Authorized Mahindra Dealer for paint
4. To avoid damage of seals and rear glass.
touch-up or paint repairs
• Avoid Contact type Automatic car washes, as bristles/brushes
• Remove particles such as bird droppings, tree sap, insect
can disturb sealing / sealants as well as damage the hardtop
deposits, tar spots, road salt and industrial fallout before
surface.
repairing paint chips
• Do not use high pressure jet with narrow spray angle. Use the
• Always read the instructions before using the products
nozzle with wider spray angle for washing.
17.9.7 Aluminium Wheels And Wheel Covers (if

Narrow Spray Angle Wider Spray Angle
equipped)
Aluminum wheels and wheel covers are coated with a clear coat of
paint finish. In order to maintain their shine;
• Clean weekly with wheel and tire cleaner, which is available at
W52R25 W52R26 your Authorized Mahindra Dealer. Heavy dirt and brake dust
accumulation may require agitation with a sponge. Rinse
thoroughly with a strong stream of water
• Never apply any cleaning chemicals to hot or warm wheel rims
Failure to adhere to these guidelines, may cause damage to or covers
mountings/ seal/ sealant/ Interiors or may result in Water/
air leakage in to cabin, surface damage/stains on the hardtop. • Do not use hydrofluoric acid-based or high caustic-based wheel
cleaners, steel wool, fuels or strong household detergents

MAINTENANCE
17.9.8 Plastic (Non-painted) Exterior Parts addition to alcohol which helps remove the hot wax deposited on
the wiper blade and windshield. Be sure to replace wiper blades
Use only approved products to clean plastic parts. These products when they appear worn or do not function properly.
are available with your authorized dealer. You can use these
cleaners; • Do not use abrasives, as they may cause scratches.
• Do not use fuel, kerosene, or paint thinner to clean any glass
• For routine cleaning of plastic parts
parts.
• For tar or grease spots
If you cannot remove those streaks after cleaning with the glass
• For plastic head lamp lenses cleaner or if the wipers chatter and move in a jerky motion, clean
the outer surface of the windshield and the wiper blades using a
sponge or soft cloth with a neutral detergent or mild-abrasive
17.9.9 Windows and Wiper Blades cleaning solution. After cleaning, rinse the windshield and wiper
blades with clean water. The windshield is clean if beads do not
The front windshield, side windows and the wiper blades should be form when you rinse the windshield with water.
cleaned regularly. If the wipers do not wipe properly, substances on
the vehicle's glass or the wiper blades may be the cause. These Do not use sharp objects, such as a razor blade, to remove decals,
may include hot wax treatments used by commercial car washes, as it may cause damage to the glass or rear windshield heater grid
water repellent coatings, tree sap, or other organic contamination; lines (if equipped).
these contaminants may cause squeaking or chatter noise from
the blades, and streaking and smearing of the windshield.
17.9.10 Instrument Panel/Interior Trim and Cluster
To clean these items follow these tips; Lens
• The windshield, rear windows and side windows may be cleaned
with a non-abrasive cleaner such as Clear Spray Glass Cleaner,
available at your Authorized Mahindra Dealer.
Do not use chemical solvents or strong detergents when
• The wiper blades can be cleaned with alcohol or Premium cleaning the steering wheel or instrument panel.
Windshield Washer Concentrate, available at your Authorized
Mahindra Dealer. This washer fluid contains a special solution in

MAINTENANCE
Clean the instrument panel, interior trim areas and cluster lens • Remove light stains and soil with carpet and upholstery cleaner
with a clean and damp white cotton cloth, then with a clean and dry
• If grease or tar is present on the material, spot-clean the area
white cotton cloth; you may also use Dash and Vinyl Cleaner on the
first with a stain remover
instrument panel and interior trim areas.
• Do not use household cleaning products or glass cleaners, which
• Avoid cleaners or polishes that increase the gloss of the upper
can stain and discolor the fabric and affect the flame retardant
portion of the instrument panel. The dull finish in this area helps
protect the driver from undesirable windshield reflection abilities of the seat materials
• Do not use cleaning solvents, bleach or dye on the vehicle's
• Do not use household or glass cleaners as these may damage
safety belts, as these actions may weaken the belt webbing.
the finish of the instrument panel, interior trim and cluster lens
If a staining liquid like coffee/juice has been spilled on the
instrument panel or on the interior trim surfaces, clean as follows; 17.9.12 Leatherette Seats (where applicable)
• Wipe up spilled liquid using a clean white cotton cloth Your leather seating surfaces have a clear, protective coating over
the leather.
• Apply Vinyl Cleaner to the wiped area and spread around evenly
• To clean, use a soft cloth with a leather and vinyl cleaner. Dry the
• Apply cleaner to a clean white cotton cloth and press the cloth
area with a soft cloth
onto the soiled area and allow this to set in at room temperature
for 30 minutes • To help maintain its resiliency and color, use the leather care kit,
available from an Authorized Mahindra Dealer
• Remove the soaked cloth, and if it is not soiled badly, use this
cloth to clean the area with a rubbing motion for 60 seconds • Do not use household cleaning products, alcohol solutions,
solvents or cleaners intended for rubber, vinyl and plastics, or
• Following this, wipe area dry with a clean white cotton cloth
oil/petroleum-based leather conditioners. These products may
cause premature wearing of the clear, protective coating
17.9.11 Interior Maintenance
For fabric, carpets, cloth seats, safety belts and seats:
• Remove dust and loose dirt with a vacuum cleaner

MAINTENANCE
In some instances, a color or dye transfer can occur when wet Whenever you get the air-conditioning system serviced, make
clothing comes in contact with leather upholstery. If this occurs, sure the service facility uses a refrigerant recycling system.
clean the leather immediately to avoid permanent staining. This system captures the refrigerant for re-use. Releasing the
refrigerant into the atmosphere may cause damage to the
environment.
17.9.13 Underbody
Flush the complete underside of your vehicle frequently. Keep body 17.11 Vehicle Storage
and door drain holes free from packed dirt. You can also use an
anti-corrosion spray for the underbody to avoid rusting and If you are leaving your vehicle for more than 2 weeks you may want
corrosion especially for vehicles in coastal places. to take stopping to protect your battery. Disconnect the negative
cable from the battery. Anytime you store your vehicle, or keep it
out of service (i. e. vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air
17.10 Air Conditioning System Maintenance conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the fresh air
mode and high blower speed setting. This will ensure adequate
Your vehicle's air-conditioning is a sealed system. Any major system lubrication to minimize the possibility of compressor
maintenance, such as recharging should be done by a qualified damage when the system is started again.
technician. However, you can do a few things by yourself to make
sure the air conditioning works efficiently. It is recommended storing the vehicle in a covered, clean, dry, well
leveled, ventilated and closed place.
Run the air-conditioning system at least once a week, even during
the cold weather months. Run it for at least ten minutes with the
engine running at normal operating temperature. This circulates 17.12 Winter Care
the lubricating oil contained in the refrigerant.
17.12.1 Dealing With Ice
Make sure you have window ice scrapers and de-icers for the locks.
When you're stuck, having a small shovel is useful to dig out of the

MAINTENANCE
snow. keep a bag of sand in the trunk will give added traction in • Run for a minimum of 20 minutes to allow the engine to come
rear-wheel drive vehicles and can be used to sprinkle on the snow up to the normal operating temperature. This will allow the oil to
and ice to gain better traction. And don't forget personal protection circulate and will also open up the thermostat so that your
such as a warm coat, hat, gloves and a blanket, in case you get radiator anti-freeze circulates as well
stuck in a storm.
• Start up the air conditioner and/or heater and run both for 10
minutes or so. Again, circulating fluids is essential for good life of
17.12.2 Keep Enough Fuel in the Tank the system
• If your vehicle has power steering, you may want to turn the
Never let the fuel level in the tank drop below the half-full mark. A
wheels a few times to keep the fluids flowing
sudden storm with unexpected heavy rains could leave you
stranded for hours. Having adequate fuel supply will allow you to idle
the engine from time to time to keep warm. 17.12.4 Exterior
Do not:
Wash and wax your car to provide an extra layer of protection to
• Tap the ice on the window to crack it or chip it for a good place your paint.
to start scraping. You could end up cracking more than the ice
and end up with a cracked or shattered windshield/ window
17.12.5 Vinyl and Rubber
• Pour warm or hot water on the windshield to melt ice. This will
crack your windshield Use a good conditioner on all vinyl and rubber parts to prevent from
drying out.
17.12.3 During Winter Storage
17.12.6 Interior
Start the engine occasionally, here are a few pointers to keep in
mind; Clean the glass, shampoo the carpets, dig in between the seats to
see what's there, clean the upholstery in all nooks and corners.
• Run it in a well ventilated area. Carbon monoxide can build up
quickly

MAINTENANCE
17.12.7 Engine
Check all hoses and wires to make sure everything is in good

condition and replace any that need to be. The last thing to do is to
make sure the internal components of the engine remain lubricated
and don't corrode.
If the engine is being started after a very long period of non-use,

warm up the engine at an idle speed for 2-3 minutes before
driving the vehicle.
17.13 Bulb Replacement
17.13.1 Head Lamp Bulb Replacement
DANGER / CAUT
SHIELD ION
EYES
EXPLOSIVE
GASES
CAN CAUSE BLINDNESS
NO
SPARKS
OR INJURY FLAMES
SMOKING
AMARON
The head lamp bulb can be replaced without removing the head
lamp assembly from the vehicle. The head lamp assembly has
been removed here for illustration purpose only.
To replace the head lamp bulb;
• Ensure ignition is switched OFF

MAINTENANCE
• Remove the bulb connector

• Remove rear dust cover from the head lamp To avoid burning yourself, do not replace the light bulbs when
• Press and slightly pull up the lock pin to unlock the bulb. they are hot. Halogen bulbs have pressurized gas inside and
are to be handled with special care. Mishandling it may cause
• Remove the bulb from the head lamp assembly the bulb to burst or shatter. Hold the bulb with its metal/plastic
• Insert the new bulb (of the same wattage), and follow the reverse holder/base and do not touch the glass part with bare hands.
procedure to assemble the bulb in the headlight assembly Using bulbs with units of higher output capacity/wattage is
illegal and may damage your vehicle’s electrical system.
Replacement bulbs must meet the specification of originally
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil contamination fitted bulbs.
will severely shorten bulb life. If the bulb comes in contact with
any oily surface, clean the bulb with rubbing alcohol.

Alphabetical Index
4WD High . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-30
4WD Low. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-29
Battery Mounted Fuse Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
Battery Specification. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
D
4WD System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-25 Blower Speed Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-10 D : Drive position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-11
Blower Speed Control Knob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5 Daytime Running Lamp (DRL) (if applicable) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-4 Dealing With Ice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17-34
Bulb Replacements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17-36 DEF Alert. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
Bulb Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5 DEF Dosing Malfunction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
A DEF Indicator Lamp (If equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-28
DEF Level Low. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
After Driving Off-road or through Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-24 DEF Operating Condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Air Conditioning System Maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17-34 DEF Quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
Air Distribution Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-9
Air Distribution Control Switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-4
C Defogging/De-misting and Defrosting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-8, 13-15
Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Air Intake Mode Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-6, 13-11 Can/Cup/Bottle Holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-18 Digital Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-12
Air-conditioner ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-6, 13-12 Cautions for ISOFIX Seat usage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-21 Dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Airbag Deployment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8 Center/Side Vents. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-3 Distance to Empty (DTE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-12
Airbag Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11 Central Locking System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4 Door Ajar Warning Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-25
Airbag ECU Malfunction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12 Changing a Flat tyre. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-7 Door Alerts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-21
Airbag Inflation/Deployment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5 Changing the Wiper Blade. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17-17 Doors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Airbag Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12 Check Engine Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-27 DPF Alert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
Airbag Non-deployment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9 Checking the Electrolyte Level. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17-20 DPF Indicator Lamp (If equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-27
Airbag Repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12 Checking the Wiper Blades. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17-17 Drive Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8
Airbag Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11 Checking/Topping Brake Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17-13 Drive Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-10
Airbag System Malfunction Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4 Checking/Topping Engine Coolant Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17-12 Driver and Front Passenger Airbag. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
Airbag Warning Lamp. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-26 Checking/Topping Power Steering Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17-15 Driver Seat Belt Reminder Indication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10
Airbags. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1 Checking/Topping the Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17-11 Driver Seat Height Adjust. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Aluminium Wheels And Wheel Covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17-31 Chemicals and Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-3 Driving and Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-6 Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11 Driving Through Water. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-23
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Malfunction Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-27 Child Restraint and Airbag. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7 Driving Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9
Appearance Care and Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17-20 Child Restraint System (CRS) Fitment using the seat belt system. . . . . . . . 6- Driving Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-20
Audio/Infotainment Manual. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7 11
Auto Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7 Child Restraint System (CRS) Installation Using ISOFIX & Top
Auto Unlocking. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7 Tether. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-8 Clock Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9
AUX and USB Ports. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-15
Average Fuel Efficiency (AFE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-11
Co-Driver Lift & Slide seat (If equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Contamination/ Incorrect DEF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
E
Average Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8 Convertible Soft Top Fold and Unfold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-23 Electric ORVM Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Creep Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-15 Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-7
Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-31 Electronic Stability Program (ESP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-17
Cruise Control Activation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-33 Emission Control Alerts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-21
Cruise Control De-activation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-33 Engine Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-15
B Cruise Indicator. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-31 Engine Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17-21
Engine Compartment Fuse Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17-19 Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4
Battery Charging System Warning Lamp. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-26 Engine Immobiliser System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11
Alphabetical Index
Engine Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17-10
Gear Selector Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-8
Gear Shift Interlock system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-13
I
Engine Oil Consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17-10 Gear Shift Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-5 Identifying Components in the Engine Compartment - Diesel . . . . . . . . . . 17-6
Engine Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-2 General Driving Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-20 If RKE is Lost . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
ESP OFF (If equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-18 General Maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-9 If your vehicle is submerged . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-22
ESP OFF Lamp (If equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-30 General Owners Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-1 Ignition Key Interlock system (If equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-13
ESP ON (If equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-17 General Safety Information and Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3 Ignition Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2
ESP System Warning Lamp (If equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-30 General Warnings and Instructions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6 Immobiliser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-28
Exterior Chrome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17-21 Get the most from your service and maintenance visits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-3 In the Engine Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17-10
Exterior Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4 Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-18 Infant and Child Safety. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
Glow Plug Indicator (If equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-31 Inflating Your Tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-4
Grip Handle and Coat Hook. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-19 Instantaneous Fuel Economy (IFE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-11
Instrument Cluster. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1
Instrument Cluster Screen flow (If equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7
F Instrument Cluster Tell-Tale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
Instrument Cluster Tell-Tale -Assames . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
Fastening the Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
Fastening the Seat Belt (3-Point type) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
H Instrument Cluster Tell-Tale -Bengali. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
Instrument Cluster Tell-Tale –Tamil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28
Feature Matrix. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1 Handling of DEF. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3 Instrument Cluster Tell-Tale- Telugu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30
Flat Tyre. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13 Hazard on Panic Braking. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9 Instrument Cluster Tell-Tale-Gujarathi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16
Flick-Wipe (Mist). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-16 Hazard Warning Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10, 16-1 Instrument Cluster Tell-Tale-Hindi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18
Flowing Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-24 HDC Malfunction (if equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-29 Instrument Cluster Tell-Tale-Kannada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20
Fluid Leaks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17-10 Head Lamp / High Beam Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-28 Instrument Cluster Tell-Tale-Malayalam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22
Fog Lamps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9 Head Lamp Bulb Replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17-36 Instrument Cluster Tell-Tale-Marathi. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24
Follow-Me Home (FMH) Non RKE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11 Head Lamp Flash. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8 Instrument Cluster Tell-Tale-Oriya . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26
Follow-Me Home (FMH) RKE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11 Head Lamp High Beam/Low Beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7 Instrument Panel Fuse Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Four Wheel Drive. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-13 Head Lamp Levelling System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8 Instrument Panel Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Front Fog Lamp (if equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-28 Head Lamp On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6 Instrument Panel/Interior Trim and Cluster Lens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17-32
Front Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1 Head Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4 Interior Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12
Front Seat Recline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2 HEATING, VENTILATION AND AIR-CONDITIONING SYSTEM Interior Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17-33
Front Seat Slide. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2 (HVAC) (If equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1 Interior Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
Front Windshield-Defog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-8, 13-15 HHC malfunction (If equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-29 Intermittent (INT) Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-16
Fuel Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-11 High Engine Coolant Temperature Warning Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-29 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
Fuel Level Gauge. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3 High Speed Wiping. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-16
Fuel-Lid Opening and Closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-35 Hill Descent Control (HDC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-29
Functionalities of Tiretronics System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15-11 Hill Hold Control (HHC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-31
Fuses and Relays. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5 Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-20
How to Calculate Fuel Efficiency (Mileage) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-38
HVAC Air Filter (Cabin Air Filter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-13
J
HVAC Controls (if equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-4 Jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
HVAC Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-2 Jack Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
G Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-3
Gear Indicator. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-16
Gear information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5
Alphabetical Index
K O R
Keep Enough Fuel in the Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17-35 OBD Check Lamp. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-25 R : Reverse position. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-10
Kickdown Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-15 Odometer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3 Radial Ply Tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-5
Off Road Driving Precautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-22 Rapid Cabin Cooling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-14
Oils, Fluids and Flushing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-3 Rapid Cabin Heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-14
Opening the Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-4 Rear Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Operating Instructions/Precautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-26 Rear Seat Foldable (If equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
L Operation of RPAS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3
Operation of Tiretronics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-8
Rear Seat Recline - 2nd Row (If equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Rear Swing Gate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-5, 9-2
Lamps Off. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6 Outside Ambient Temperature (If equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5 Rear Windshield Defogging/De-misting (If equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-8
Lead Me to Vehicle (LMV)(RKE). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12 Outside Rear View Mirror (ORVM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3 Recommended Gear Shifting Speeds. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-7
Leather Seats. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17-33 Override Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-34 Refilling DEF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Life of Tyre. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-5 Overspeed Alert (If equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-27 Refilling DEF (Applicable for Diesel Variant). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-36
Limitations of RPAS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-7 Regen Alerts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Limp Home Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-9 Regen Indicator Lamp (If equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-31
Limp Home Mode (LHM). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-16 Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
Locks and Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1 Restore the Tools, Jack and flat tyre Securely . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19
Low Engine Oil Pressure Warning Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-25
Low Fuel Warning Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-28
P RESUME Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-32
REVERSE PARKING ASSIST SYSTEM (RPAS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1
Low Speed Wiping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-16 P : Park Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-9 RKE Battery Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
Lumbar Support (if equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3 Paint Chips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17-31 RKE Operating Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
Park Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-27 Roof Lamps (If equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12
Parking Brake. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-5 RPAS Information on Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2
Parking Brake Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-29 RPAS Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1
Parking Lamps On. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
M Parking on a Hill/Incline. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-5
Passenger Air Bag ON/OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-16
M : Manual Shift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-11 Passenger Air Bag ON/OFF Instruction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Maintenance - Outside the Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17-18
Maintenance Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-3
Passenger Occupant Detection System (PODS) & Seat Belt
Reminder Indication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
S
Maintenance-Inside the Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17-18 Pay Attention. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-4 Safety Symbols. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Manual – HVAC Controls (if equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-9 Plastic (Non-painted) Exterior Parts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17-32 Safety Tips - Before Starting your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1
Manual Transmission. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-5 Power Outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-13 Search (Panic) Function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
Mute/Un-mute Function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8 Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1 Seat Belt Warning Lamp. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-28
Precautions while Handling RKE: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11 Seat Belts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Precautions while Washing Convertible Top . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17-22 Securing Methods of Child Restraint System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
Precautions while Washing Hard Top . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17-26 Selective Catalytic Reduction(SCR). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
Protect your Warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-2 Self Removing SRS Related Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11
N Servicing and Summary Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
SET - Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-33
N : Neutral position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-10 SET+ Button. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-33
Need Assistance?. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-2 Shifting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-27
Neutral Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-16 Sitting in the Correct Position. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
Snow Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-6
Alphabetical Index
Spare Wheel Removal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15 Tyre Rotation Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-6
Speakers & Tweeters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-21
Speed Rating. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-2
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2
Starting and Driving Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-14
Starting the Engine. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-3
Steering. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1
U
Steering Controls - Audio Control System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-3 Underbody. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17-34
Stopping the Engine. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-5 Unfastening the Seat Belt (both 3-Point ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10
Suggestions for Obtaining Service for your Vehicle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-2 Unlock the Vehicle with RKE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
Sun Visor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-19 Utility Holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-18
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
Switch Bank (If equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-21
V
T Vehicle Condition Related Warning (if equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-17
Vehicle Does not Start - Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-1
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2 Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23
Technical Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20 Vehicle Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-13
Temperature Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-11 Vehicle Self Maintenance - General Precautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-4
Temperature Control Knob. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5 Voice Messaging System(VMS)(If equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-22
Tilt Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2
Tips for Better Fuel Economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-37
Tire Direction Monitoring System (If equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-13
Tiretronics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-31
Tiretronics (if equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-8
Tiretronics Learning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15-15
W
Tiretronics Sensor Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-9 Warning / Tell-tale Lamps in the Instrument Cluster – Diesel. . . . . . .10-22
Tiretronics Sensor Removal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15-10 Warning for Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-20
Tiretronics Warning Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-9 Warning Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
To Lock the Vehicle with RKE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6 Warning Lamps Overview – Diesel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
To Owner’s of a Mahindra Vehicle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4 Warranty Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-2
Towing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-6 Washing the Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17-20
Towing Equipment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-6 Water-in-Fuel Warning Lamp (if equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-26
Towing your Vehicle during Emergency. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-8 Wheel Nut Loosening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
Traction Control System (TCS) (if equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-19 Wheel Tightness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-7
Tread Wear Indicators (TWI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-5 Windows and Wiper Blades. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17-32
Trip Meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8 Windshield Washer Fluid Top-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17-16
Turn Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-25 Windshield Wipers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-15
Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5 Winter Care. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17-34
Tyre Direction Monitoring System (TDMS) Alert. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-20 Wipe/Wash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-16
Tyre Pressure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-3 Wiper Control Stalk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-15
Tyre Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-1 Wiper Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-15

W501 - NEW THAR - OwnersManual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

W501 - NEW THAR - OwnersManual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Owner’s Manual

1 Warranty Coverage............................................................................................................................................... Refer WI&MG* (P.g. 14)

1 INTRODUCTION AND SAFETY PRECAUTIONS ........................ 1-1 Rear Overview......................................................................... 3-2

1 INTRODUCTION AND SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

© Copyright Mahindra and Mahindra Ltd. 112020 1-1

1.2 Servicing and Summary Data

1.3 Safety Symbols

DANGER indicates an imminently hazardous situation which, if

1-2 © Copyright Mahindra and Mahindra Ltd. 112020

© Copyright Mahindra and Mahindra Ltd. 112020 1-3

Use of electronic devices such as mobile phones, computers,

1-4 © Copyright Mahindra and Mahindra Ltd. 112020

© Copyright Mahindra and Mahindra Ltd. 112020 1-5

To avoid counterfeit parts and to protect our brand image,

1-6 © Copyright Mahindra and Mahindra Ltd. 112020

Vehicle Safety DISCLAIMER:

M&M will not be liable for any losses and/or damages in

Please refer the user e-manual in infotainment for details regarding:

© Copyright Mahindra and Mahindra Ltd. 112020 1-7

Voice Message System (VMS) * � � � �

Manual Central Locking System � � � � � � �

Central Locking with Remote access � � � � � �

18 cm (7”) Color Touch Screen Infotainment

Follow me home lamp � � � � � � �

© Copyright Mahindra and Mahindra Ltd. 112020 2-1

Front Fog Lamp � � � �

Apple Car Play � � � �

Ecosense with GSI in cluster � � � �

Blue Sense (App Control + Smart Watch) � � � �

Seat Belt Reminder � � � � � � �

ABS with EBD � � � � � � �

ESP with Active traction control � � � �

Reverse Park Assist System (RPAS) � � � � � � �

ISOFIX/Belted Baby Seat (2nd Row) � � � � � � �

Seat Belt Reminder (Drvr/Codrvr) � � � � � � �

2-2 © Copyright Mahindra and Mahindra Ltd. 112020

Collapsible Steering column � � � � � � �

Seat Height Adjustment (Manual) � � � � � �

Internally Adjustable Power ORVM � � � �

Power Windows – Front Doors � � � � � � �

Steering Mounted Controls � � � �

© Copyright Mahindra and Mahindra Ltd. 112020 2-3

2.2 Dimensions 2.2.3 Side View

2.2.1 Front View

2-4 © Copyright Mahindra and Mahindra Ltd. 112020

2.3 Bulb Specification 2.4 Fuses and Relays

Tail / Stop lamp LED: Stop 6.8W, Rear Position

© Copyright Mahindra and Mahindra Ltd. 112020 2-5

• Battery Mounted Fuse Box 5A 5A AIR BAG IGN

2.4.1 Instrument Panel Fuse Box 10A 5A INFO IGN

15A 5A NOT USED 15A

20A 20A 25A WIPER/

2-6 © Copyright Mahindra and Mahindra Ltd. 112020

Fuse No Fuse Rating Circuit Fuse No Fuse Rating Circuit

© Copyright Mahindra and Mahindra Ltd. 112020 2-7

Fuse puller is available in the fuse box cover.

2-8 © Copyright Mahindra and Mahindra Ltd. 112020

For Diesel Engine Fuse No Fuse Rating Circuit

© Copyright Mahindra and Mahindra Ltd. 112020 2-9

Fuse No Fuse Rating Circuit Relay No Circuit

2-10 © Copyright Mahindra and Mahindra Ltd. 112020

For Petrol Engine Fuse No Fuse Rating Circuit

© Copyright Mahindra and Mahindra Ltd. 112020 2-11